TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks Bindings and Palettes ... · FTL Realm Server Connection ......

TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks™ Bindingsand Palettes ReferenceSoftware Release 6.2November 2014

Two-Second Advantage®

amkulkar

Typewritten Text

Document Update: February 2015

Important Information

SOME TIBCO SOFTWARE EMBEDS OR BUNDLES OTHER TIBCO SOFTWARE. USE OF SUCHEMBEDDED OR BUNDLED TIBCO SOFTWARE IS SOLELY TO ENABLE THE FUNCTIONALITY(OR PROVIDE LIMITED ADD-ON FUNCTIONALITY) OF THE LICENSED TIBCO SOFTWARE. THEEMBEDDED OR BUNDLED SOFTWARE IS NOT LICENSED TO BE USED OR ACCESSED BY ANYOTHER TIBCO SOFTWARE OR FOR ANY OTHER PURPOSE.

USE OF TIBCO SOFTWARE AND THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS ANDCONDITIONS OF A LICENSE AGREEMENT FOUND IN EITHER A SEPARATELY EXECUTEDSOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, OR, IF THERE IS NO SUCH SEPARATE AGREEMENT, THECLICKWRAP END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT WHICH IS DISPLAYED DURING DOWNLOADOR INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE (AND WHICH IS DUPLICATED IN THE LICENSE FILE)OR IF THERE IS NO SUCH SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT OR CLICKWRAP END USERLICENSE AGREEMENT, THE LICENSE(S) LOCATED IN THE “LICENSE” FILE(S) OF THESOFTWARE. USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO THOSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, ANDYOUR USE HEREOF SHALL CONSTITUTE ACCEPTANCE OF AND AN AGREEMENT TO BEBOUND BY THE SAME.

This document contains confidential information that is subject to U.S. and international copyright lawsand treaties. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the writtenauthorization of TIBCO Software Inc.

TIBCO, TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks, TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service,TIBCO Business Studio, TIBCO Enterprise Administrator, TIBCO ActiveSpaces, TIBCO Runtime Agent,TIBCO Designer, and Two-Second Advantage are either registered trademarks or trademarks of TIBCOSoftware Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

Enterprise Java Beans (EJB), Java Platform Enterprise Edition (Java EE), Java 2 Platform EnterpriseEdition (J2EE), and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks ofOracle Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

All other product and company names and marks mentioned in this document are the property of theirrespective owners and are mentioned for identification purposes only.

THIS SOFTWARE MAY BE AVAILABLE ON MULTIPLE OPERATING SYSTEMS. HOWEVER, NOTALL OPERATING SYSTEM PLATFORMS FOR A SPECIFIC SOFTWARE VERSION ARE RELEASEDAT THE SAME TIME. SEE THE README FILE FOR THE AVAILABILITY OF THIS SOFTWAREVERSION ON A SPECIFIC OPERATING SYSTEM PLATFORM.

THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.

THIS DOCUMENT COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICALERRORS. CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN; THESECHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED IN NEW EDITIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT. TIBCOSOFTWARE INC. MAY MAKE IMPROVEMENTS AND/OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT(S)AND/OR THE PROGRAM(S) DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT AT ANY TIME.

THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE MODIFIED AND/OR QUALIFIED, DIRECTLY ORINDIRECTLY, BY OTHER DOCUMENTATION WHICH ACCOMPANIES THIS SOFTWARE,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY RELEASE NOTES AND "READ ME" FILES.

Copyright © 2001-2015 TIBCO Software Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

TIBCO Software Inc. Confidential Information

2

TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks™ Bindings and Palettes Reference

Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

TIBCO Documentation and Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Changing Help Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Basic Activities Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Critical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Local Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

For Each . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Iterate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Repeat on Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

While . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Constructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Compensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Get Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Rethrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Set Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Set EPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Throw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

REST Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Rest Service Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

SOAP Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

SOAP Service Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

SOAP Reference Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

File Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Copy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Create File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

File Poller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

List Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Read File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Remove File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

3


Rename File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Wait for File Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Write File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

FTL Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

FTL Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

FTL Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

FTL Request Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

FTL Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

FTP Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

FTP Change Default Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

FTP Delete File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

FTP Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

FTP Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

FTP Get Default Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

FTP Make Remote Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

FTP Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

FTP Quote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

FTP Remove Remote Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

FTP Rename File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

FTP SYS Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

General Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Call Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Checkpoints and Confirm Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

External Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Get Shared Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Mapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Set Shared Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

HTTP Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

HTTP Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Send HTTP Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Sending Data in the HTTP Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Wait for HTTP Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Send HTTP Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

4


JAVA Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Configuring JAVA in BusinessWorks Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Converting JAVA Class to XML Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Creating Custom XPath Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Using Custom XPath Function at Design Time and Runtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Deleting Custom XPath Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Java Invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Java Process Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Java To XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

XML To Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

JDBC Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

JDBC Call Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

JDBC Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

JDBC Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

SQL Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

JMS Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

Common JMS Properties and Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Get JMS Queue Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

JMS Receive Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

JMS Request Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

JMS Send Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Reply to JMS Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Wait for JMS Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Mail Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Receive Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Send Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Parse Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Parsing a Large Number of Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

MimeParser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Parse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Render Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Rendezvous Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Datatype Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Field Names in Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Globalization Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Rendezvous Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Rendezvous Reply To Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Rendezvous Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Rendezvous Request Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Wait for Rendezvous Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

5


REST and JSON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

BW JSON Utils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Invoke REST API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Restrictions on XML Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Parse JSON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Render JSON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Shared Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

FTL Realm Server Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

FTP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

HTTP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

Persistent Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

HTTP Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Identity Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

JDBC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

JMS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

JNDI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Java Global Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Keystore Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

LDAP Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Proxy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Rendezvous Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

SMTP Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

SSL Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

SSL Client Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

TCP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Thread Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

TCP Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Using the TCP Palette Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Read TCP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

TCP Close Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

TCP Open Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

TCP Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Wait for TCP Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Write TCP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

XML Activities Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Parse XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

Render XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Transform XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Activity Icons Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

6


Figures

Parsing a Text String into a Data Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

7


TIBCO Documentation and Support Services

All TIBCO documentation is available on the TIBCO Documentation site, which can be found here:

https://docs.tibco.com

Product-Specific Documentation

Documentation for TIBCO products is not bundled with the software. Instead, it is available on theTIBCO Documentation site. To directly access documentation for this product, double-click thefollowing file:

TIBCO_HOME/release_notes/TIB_BW_version_docinfo.html

The following documents for this product can be found on the TIBCO Documentation site:

● Concepts● Installation● Getting Started● Application Development● Administration● Bindings and Palettes Reference● Samples● Error Codes● API Reference● Migration

How to Contact TIBCO Support

For comments or problems with this manual or the software it addresses, contact TIBCO Support asfollows:

● For an overview of TIBCO Support, and information about getting started with TIBCO Support,visit this site:

http://www.tibco.com/services/support

● If you already have a valid maintenance or support contract, visit this site:

https://support.tibco.com

Entry to this site requires a user name and password. If you do not have a user name, you canrequest one.

How to Join TIBCOmmunity

TIBCOmmunity is an online destination for TIBCO customers, partners, and resident experts. It is aplace to share and access the collective experience of the TIBCO community. TIBCOmmunity offersforums, blogs, and access to a variety of resources. To register, go to:

https//www.tibcommunity.com

8


https://docs.tibco.com

http://www.tibco.com/services/support

https://support.tibco.com

Changing Help Preferences

By default, documentation access from TIBCO Business Studio is online, through the TIBCO ProductDocumentation site (Doc site) at https://docs.tibco.com/which contains the latest version of thedocumentation. Check the Doc site frequently for updates. To access the product documentationoffline, download the documentation to a local directory or an internal web server and then change thehelp preferences in TIBCO Business Studio.

Prerequisites

Before changing the help preferences to access documentation locally or from an internal web server,download documentation from https://docs.tibco.com/.

1. Go to: https://docs.tibco.com/

2. In the Search field, enter ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks and press Enter.

3. Select the TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks product from the list. This opens the productdocumentation page for the latest version.

4. Click Download All.

5. A zip file containing the latest documentation downloads to your web browser's default downloadlocation. Copy the zip file to a local directory or to an internal web server and then unzip the file.

To change help preferences on the Preferences dialog to access the documentation from a customlocation:

Procedure

1. In TIBCO Business Studio, click Window > Preferences. On Mac OS X, click TIBCO BusinessStudio > Preferences.

2. In the Preferences dialog, click BusinessWorks > Help.

3. Click Custom Location and then click Browse to select the html directory in the folder where youunzipped the documentation, or provide the URL to the html directory on your internal web server.

4. Click Apply and then click OK.

9


https://docs.tibco.com/

https://docs.tibco.com/

Basic Activities Palette

Basic activities are a simple means of interacting with a service, manipulating the passing data, orhandling exceptions. They also contain Loops that are Groups with Conditions, which follow a patternat run time such as, initialize the loop, update the loop at each iteration, and test conditions for the loopto stop iterating. The available types of loops are: Local Transaction, For Each, Iterate, Repeat, RepeatOn Error, Scope, and While.

Critical SectionCritical Section groups are used to synchronize process instances. The ActiveMatrix BusinessWorksengine can execute multiple process instances concurrently. You can use Critical Section groups tosynchronize the set of actions performed in the process across multiple process instances. Only oneprocess instance can execute the critical section group and its contents at any specified time. Otherconcurrently running process instances that are associated with the corresponding critical section groupwait at the start of the critical section group, until the process instance that is currently executingcomplete the critical section group.

General

The General tab has the following fields.

Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the group in the process.

Group Type The type of the group. The default is Critical Section.

Timeout The maximum time (in milliseconds) that a process instance waits at the startof the critical section group while another process instance is executing thecritical section. When a timeout occurs, the process instance that is waiting toexecute the critical section fails with an Activity Timeout Exception.

The timeout field can be used to avoid deadlock situations.

Shared Lock Select this check box to synchronize multiple critical section groups that usethe same shared variable as a lock.

Shared VariableType

The Shared Lock option can be defined using a Module Shared Variable or aJob Shared Variable. When a module shared variable is used against jobshared variable to define Shared Lock, it has different implications.

● Module Shared Variable: provides a shared lock to synchronize processinstances from different processes that are within a module. Using amodule shared variable, you can synchronize multiple Critical Sectiongroups that can be part of different process instancse. These CriticalSection groups can be in the same process or in another process, providedall processes are contained within a BusinessWorks Module.

● Job Shared Variable: provides a shared lock to synchronize within a job.Using a job shared variable, you can synchronize multiple Critical Sectiongroups that are part of the same job. These Critical Section groups can bein the same process or in an another process, provided all process instancesare part of the same job.

10


Field Description

Shared Variable Name of the Module Shared Variable or Job Shared Variable.

Description

Provide a short description for the group in this field.

Variables

The Variables tab provides a way to declare variables that are only limited to the scope of this group.

You can select from the following available Variable Type options:

● String● Integer● Decimal● Boolean● Date&Time

Local TransactionUse Local Transaction group for multiple activities to be part of a local transaction. A local transactiongroup ensures that all participants of the transaction are rolled back together. However, the localtransaction is not equivalent to an XA transaction and does not use a transaction coordinator. Instead, asingle resource performs all its transaction work.

Not all TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks activities can participate in the local transaction. Thefollowing core activity types have local transactional capabilities:

● JMS● JDBC

A Local Transaction group has to be further configured as a specific type of a Local Transaction orTransaction Transport. The Transaction Transport type determines the activities that can participate inthis local transaction group. For example, "JDBC" transaction transport only provides transactionsupport for certain JDBC activities.

General


Name Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the activity in the process.

TransactionTransport

The transport type. Select from the following available transaction transporttypes:

● None● JMS: To configure a JMS local transaction, select JMS as the transaction

type of the group.● JDBC: To configure a JDBC transaction, select JDBC as the transaction

type of the group.

11


JMS

JMS activities participate in a transaction using the JMS local transaction. A JMS session, when specifiedas transacted, supports a single series of JMS operations. The local transaction group enlists a set ofproduced messages and a set of consumed messages into a unit of work. JMS local transactions use theunderlying JMS sessions to group together all the activities that are part of the transaction group intoone unit of work.

All activities using the same JMS connection are part of one transaction. If a transaction group containsactivities that use more than one JMS connection, for example, a JMS Send Message activity usingconnection 1 and another JMS Send Message activity using connection 2, there are two underlyingtransactions created.

Furthermore, activities must use the same messaging styles to be in the same transaction.

Possible deadlock situation: A deadlock situation arises if you have a JMS Send Message and a GetJMS Queue Message activities performing JMS operations on the same queue. A message not sent outuntil a commit is performed, keeps Get JMS Queue Message activity waiting indefinitely. It isrecommended not to have a design which sends and receives messages on the same destination usingthe same session in a single transaction.

When a transaction commits, its input is acknowledged and the associated output is sent. When atransaction rollback is done, all the produced messages (output stream) are destroyed and theconsumed messages (input stream) are automatically recovered. You can use the JMS sender activitieswith the JMS local transaction. At run time, the underlying JMS activities use the same transacted JMSsession to provide transaction semantics for messages sent and received by the JMS activities. For moreinformation on JMS palette and activities, refer to JMS Palette.

JDBC

Using the JDBC transaction and multiple JDBC activities, you can access the same database connectionto participate in a transaction. Only JDBC activities that use the same JDBC Connection participate inthis transaction type. However, other activities can be part of the transaction group. If the transactioncommits, all JDBC activities using the same JDBC connection in the transaction group commit. If thetransaction rolls back, all JDBC activities using the same JDBC connection in the transaction group rollback.

The transaction group commits automatically, if all activities in the group complete the transaction anda non-error transition is taken out of the transaction group. If any error occurs while processing theactivities in the group, including errors in non-JDBC activities, it rolls back the transaction and returnsan error. Individual JDBC activities can override the default transaction behavior and commitseparately. For more information on JDBC palette and activities, refer to JDBC Palette.

For EachThe For Each group is a loop element that can be used for iterating through array elements. The ForEach activity is very useful to determine these array elements dynamically at run time.

General


Field Description


Group Type The type of group. The default is For Each.

12


Field Description

Counter Name The name of the counter or Index variable.

Start Counter Value The start value for the counter ($index) which is specified through an XPathexpression. This can be a literal value.

Final Counter Value The final value of the counter which is set using an XPath expression. Thisvalue is obtained by the count of the number of elements of a specific type inthe request message.

Description

Provide a short description for the activity in this field.

Variables

A group of shared variables. Depending on the group selected in Group Type, Container displays thegroup. For example, if the For Each group is selected in the Group Type field, it displays For Each inContainer. You can add multiple complex or simple types variables.



IterateAn Iterate group repeats the series of grouped activities once for every item in an existing sequence orlist. The list can be items of any datatype. The loop executes for the number of iterations specified.

This process performs the following operations:

1. A JDBC Query activity is used to query a database and populate a list of customer records. Thecustomer records are then passed to a group containing the WriteCustomerList activity.

2. The WriteCustomerList activity writes the name and address of each customer to a file and appendsto the file as each record is written.

3. The group iterates once for every customer record returned by the CustomerQuery activity, andtransitions to the ReadCustomerList activity after processing the last record.

13


4. The process then reads the file that was written for its data to be available to the process, and thentransitions to a SendMail activity to send the contents of the customer list through email.

General


Field Description


Group Type The type of group. The default is Iterate.

Index Name The index name.

Variable List This field is an XPath expression. XPath is used to specify the schema elementyou want to refer to.

Click the Edit XPath Expression icon to specify a value for this field in theXPath Builder wizard.

You can use a simple expression containing a complete list, or a more complexone and only process certain items in the list.

Iteration Element Provide a name for a process variable containing the current iteration elementin this field.

Global When this check box is selected, the output is available for the activities outsidethe loop.

AccumulateOutput

Select this check box to accumulate the output of one of the activities in agroup.

The output of the selected activity is accumulated each time the activity isexecuted.

Output Activity Select the activity from the group of activities to execute the loop.

Output Name The name of the list of the accumulated output of the selected activity.

Description


Variables

A group of shared variables. Depending on the group selected in Group Type, Container displays thegroup. For example, if theIterate group is selected in the Group Type field, it displays Iterate inContainer. You can add multiple variables of complex or simple type.


● String● Integer● Decimal● Boolean

14


● Date&Time

RepeatThe Repeat group activity is responsible for repeating the series of grouped activities until the specifiedcondition evaluates to true. The activities are always executed once before checking whether thecondition is true. After executing the series of activities, the initial evaluation of the condition is done,and it repeats when the condition evaluates as true. The Repeat activity evaluates the loop'sconditional statement to determine whether or not more iterations of the loop are required.

General


Field Description


Group Type The type of group. The default is Repeat.

Index Name Use this field to specify a name for the index variable.

Condition The condition ($index) is specified through an XPath expression which can be aliteral value. Click the Edit XPath Expression button to set an XPath expression.

Description


Variables

A group of shared variables. The Container displays the group. This depends on the group selected inGroup Type. For example, if the Repeat group is selected in the Group Type field, it displays Repeat inContainer. You can add multiple variables of complex or simple type.



Repeat on ErrorUsing the Repeat on Error group, you can repeat a series of activities when an unmanageable erroroccurs. The activities in this group are executed once. If there are no unmanageable errors, the loopterminates. If an error occurs for which there is no error transition, the condition of the loop isevaluated. If the condition is true, the loop terminates. If the condition is false, the loop repeats untilthere is no error or the condition is true.

General


15


Field Description


Group Type The type of group. The default is Repeat on Error.


Stop RepeatCondition

The condition specifies that the activities inside the Repeat On Error are performedrepeatedly until the condition evaluates to false.

Description


Variables

A group of shared variables. Depending on the group selected in the Group Type, the Containerdisplays the group. For example, if Repeat on Error group is selected in the Group Type field, itdisplays RepeatOnError in Container. You can add multiple variables of complex or simple type.



ScopeThe Scope group comprises a collection of nested activities. Scope group is shared by all the nestedactivities. You can use a Scope to contain a unit of work, by making it easy to manage, execute, andrevert. For example, if a customer cancels an online order, the money must be returned and the onlineorder canceled, without affecting other orders. You can use a Scope to manage these activities as a unit.

General


Field Description


Group Type The type of group. The default is Scope.

Description

Provide a short description for the group.

Variables

A group of shared variables. Depending on the group selected in the Group Type, the Containerdisplays the group. For example, if the Scope group is selected in the Group Type field, it displaysScope in Container. You can add multiple variables of complex or simple type.

16




WhileThe While activity repeats the series of grouped activities if the specified condition evaluates as true.The condition is evaluated when the group is enters. If the condition evaluates to false, the activitieswithin the group are not executed.

General


Field Description


Group Type The type of group. The default is While.


Condition The condition ($index) is specified through an XPath expression which can be aliteral value. Click the Edit XPath Expression button to set an XPathexpression.

Description

Provide a short description for the group.

Variables

A group of shared variables. Depending on the group selected in the Group Type, Container displaysthe group. For example, if the Scope group is selected in the Group Type field, it displays Scope inContainer. You can add multiple variables of complex or simple type.



17


ConstructorYou must use the constructor for each class to instantiate that class.

CompensateCompensate activity is executed only from the compensation handlers when a fault is encounteredoutside a scope (this scope will have compensation handler defined). This activity triggerscompensation handler for a scope present only on the same level. All activities present in scope getexecuted successfully.

The compensation handlers are defined per scope. The compensation handlers of scopes that aredirectly enclosed by the scope and contain Compensate activity, can be executed. The handlers executein reverse order, so the handler of the last completed scope is executed first. The compensationhandlers can only be defined on scope level.

General


Field Description


Description

Provide a short description for the activity.

EmptyAn Empty activity denotes an activity with no action to be performed. You can specify the Name andDescription, but there is no input or output for this activity.

This activity is useful if you want to join multiple transition flows. For example, there are multipletransitions out of an activity and each transition takes a different path in the process. In this scenarioyou can create a transition from the activity at the end of each path to an Empty activity to resume asingle flow of execution in the process.

ExitExit activity is a synchronous activity that cancels any asynchronous activities that are in a waiting stateand terminate the process instance. You can specify the Name and Description, but there is no input oroutput for this activity.

Get ContextGet Context activity retrieves the value of the specified context resource. This is useful if your processrequires some context information from an incoming request. The process that implements theoperation can use the Get Context activity to retrieve or set values for the elements within the context.

A GetContext must be performed before using Invoke activity which overwrites the context resourceprovided as the service input. It is recommended that you use different context resources for differentcontext mappings.

General


18


Field Description


Direction The context resource whose value you want to retrieve. Select from the followingavailable options:

● Receive Service: is an inbound message from a service resource. Selecting thisoption displays the Service field.

● Return from Reference: is an outbound message from an endpoint reference.Selecting this option displays the Reference field.

● Fault from Reference: is a fault message from an endpoint reference.

Service The Service URI portion of the URL that can be used to retrieve the WSDL file.

Reference Specify the endpoint reference.

Description


Output

The following is the output for the activity.

Output Item Datatype Description

<schema> varies The value of the context resource specified in theDirection field of the General tab is the output for thisactivity. The schema for the output is determined by theschema specified for the context resource.

InvokeInvoke activity is an asynchronous activity that calls an operation of a process reference. The processreference can be configured to invoke another process (subprocess) or invoke an external servicethrough a binding such as SOAP.

General


Field Description


Service Select the service for which to specify an operation.

Description


19


Advanced

The Advanced tab has the following field.

Input item Description

Invocation Timeout(seconds)

The Invoke activity timeout in seconds. You can either select a presettimeout (Infinite, 30, 60,or 120 seconds) or specify a custom timeout inseconds.

When the Invoke activity timeouts, the in-line subprocessinstance called by the Invoke activity can be cancelled beforethe subprocess instance completes. Hence, the business logicin the cancelled process instance may not be executed to itsentirety.

Conversations

You can initiate the conversation here. Click the Add New Conversation button to initiate multipleconversations.

Input

The following is the input for the activity.

Input item Datatype Description

input message complex The input message of the operation. This element contains allthe input message parts for the operation.

Output


Outsput item Datatype Description

output message complex The output message for the operation. This element contains allthe output message parts for the operation.

RethrowRethrow activity is used within an exception-handling routine to throw the caught error again. This isuseful if you want to perform some processing within an error-handling routine, and also send it to thenext higher scope.

ReceiveReceive activity initiates the process execution based on the receipt of a request message for anoperation of the process service. The Receive activity can be configured to act as a process starter or asignal-in activity.

General


20


Field Description


Create Instance Select this check box if you want to start a process.

Service Select the process service and the operation from which to receive the request.

Description


Output Editor

The schema of the process variable must match the schema of the output of the activity shown on theOutput tab.

Output


output varies The output of this activity is the incoming message from thecalling client or service. The structure of the message isdetermined by the schema of the input message for the selectedoperation on the General tab.

ReplyReply activity is a synchronous activity that sends a message in response to a request message that wasreceived for an operation of a process service. This activity can be used to send a reply or a fault.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the activity.

Service Select the process and the operations for which to send a response.

Reply With Select from the following available options to send the reply message:

● Output Message● Undeclared Fault

Description


Input Editor

The schema of the process variable must match the schema of the input for the activity shown on theInput tab.

21


Input

Input Item Datatype Description

input varies The reply message to send. The schema depends on the outputmessage of the operation for this reply.

Set ContextYou can use Set Context activity to set the value of a context resource shared configuration resource.This is useful if you want to supply data from the process implementing an operation to the serviceagent. For example, setting some headers to the outgoing reply message.

General


Field Description


Direction The context resource whose value you want to set. Select from the followingavailable options:

● Invoke Reference● Reply to Service● Reply to Service with Fault

Reference Specify the endpoint reference.

Description


Input



input message complex The input message of the operation. This element contains allinput message parts for the operation.

Set EPRSet EPR activity is a dynamic alternative to the static service element defined in the WSDL. To use anincoming message, define the EPR schema as a part of the message in the WSDL.

An endpoint reference (EPR) combines web services elements that define the address for a resource in aSOAP header. If you use an incoming message, an EPR schema should be defined as a part of themessage in WSDL.

22


General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the activity.

DynamicReference

The name of the dynamic target interface for which this task is supplying theservice name and namespace

Description


Input


Input Item Description

SimpleEndpointReference

Contains endpoint address information for the destination of the outgoingmessage

Output


Output Item Description

EndpointReference Contains the following elements:

● Address: Endpoint address● Interface: The name of the dynamic target interface for which this task

is supplying the service name and namespace

ThrowThrow activity throws the specified fault and the control is passed to any error-handling routinedefined to handle the error. This activity is useful in a group or in a called process. You can use thisactivity to catch and raise your own error conditions. The Throw activity is useful if an error in thebusiness logic occurs during processing.

General

The General has the following fields.

Field Description


23


Field Description

Default Fault Select this check box if you want the default message text and error code forthe error message.

This is reflected in the Input Editor and Input for this activity.

Description


Input Editor

Selecting the Default Fault check box displays the message and msgCode elements in the Input Editor.

Input



message string The text of the generated error message.

msgCode string The error code of the error message. This is used as an identifierfor the error for the applications to test for an error.

Fault

This activity does not produce any fault.

24


Binding

Binding is used to establish a connection between SOA Services and their consumers. They arecommunication gateways to connect to the external world. They follow a well-known communicationprotocol that both client and service are aware of.

The two types of binding components are:

● Service Binding: used to create and expose a service to the external world. The service can containone or more operations. Once exposed, the service can be consumed by its clients.

● Reference Binding: used to create a client that can connect and communicate to an external service.

REST BindingThe REST Binding provides external connectivity for REST over HTTP. You can specify custom HTTPheaders and parameters using REST binding. It supports GET, PUT, POST, and DELETE HTTPmethods. It also supports JSON, XML, and plain text message types.

Binding

This section has the following fields.

Field Description

Resource The name of the resource.

Resource ServicePath

Specify the Path of the Service Resource.

HTTP ConnectorName

The name of the HTTP Connector.

Client Format The type of message format.

The two available message format options are: JSON and XML.

Operations

This section shows the following details.

Field Description

Name The name of the HTTP method used, for example, GET, PUT, POST, andDELETE.

Nickname The specified name of the service, for example, getBooks.

Operation Details


25


Field Description

Summary This tab has the following available options:

● Summary: The summary of the REST resource● HTTP Method: Displays the HTTP Method specified in the Operations

section. The available HTTP methods are:

— POST— GET— PUT— DELETE

Request Specifies the resource created, using the POST method.

Request and Response depend on the method selected.

Response This tab has the following available options:

● Use HTTP Headers: Selecting this check box includes the REST Webservice application (or client) within the HTTP headers and body of arequest, all of the parameters, context, and data required by the server-side component to generate a response.

● Use Custom Status Line: You can specify a custom status line (statuscode and reason phrase) to the outgoing message. The codes used mustbe defined in the configuration under the Response Status tab.

● Response with Status Code Only: The operation returns a status code asresponse, when this check box is selected. Message body is not required.For example, using a POST operation returns a 201 status code whichmeans "Created" and responds with the resource URL.

● Resource Schema: Displays the schema selected. This option is notavailable when the Use Custom Status Line and Response with StatusCode Only check boxes are selected. The available options are:

— String— Integer— Boolean— XSD element: Selecting this option to either select the XSD schema

element available under the Schemas folder of your project or acreate new XML schema resource. Click Create New Schema to acreate new XML schema resource using the Simplified Schema Editorwizard.

Response Status Specifies the response code for the operation and the code message. Forexample, code 201 means Created or code 503 means Service Unavailable.

You can also add your own custom code and reason phrase.

Parameters


26


Parameter Name Type Required

Parameter name ofthe operation used

The parameter type. It can be anyone of the following:

● String● Integer● Boolean

Whether this parameter is required.The available options are Yes or No.

Working with Path and Query Parameters

TIBCO ActiveMatrix Businessworks REST binding supports the use of path parameters for theresource service path (for example, /books/{isbn} instead of /books} in the REST service. The usermust specify every parameter by enclosing it in a { }. For example, /book/{isbn} specifies the usercan have isbn as a parameter. The client invokes this service using the URL http:/<host>:<port>/book/<isbn> where <isbn> is an actual value. Using the path parameters combined with static URL,for example, / book/{isbn}/events, is also supported.

All the parameters defined in the resource service path are made available to the user as an Input forevery operation. Refer to Support for Query and Path Parameters. See the following image for the /book/{isbn} ) example to see the Input for the GET operation.

About Swagger UI

Using the Swagger UI you can visualize RESTful services. It specifies the format (URL, method, andrepresentation) to describe REST the web services.

Partial Response in REST

Using the Partial Response feature in REST, you can retrieve only the data you need, instead of bulkdata as a response. You can also request only those fields that are required as part of the response.

For example, in the Swagger UI to select the immediate children nodes of an object, specify the requiredfield names separated by comma such as isbn, author, bookName, and so on.

The partial response feature uses a fields query parameter.

The fields keyword is reserved to be used internally by ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks. Adding the fieldskeyword as a query parameter automatically triggers support for partial responses.

Partial responses do not support selecting particular objects from an array. For example, using thefields keyword for /books/isbn, the isbn's of all the books are returned.

27


Format: The values of the fields keyword can be a comma separated value of fields of the responsemessage. Fields can be specified directly, for example, using isbn or hierarchy /book/isbn.

OSI Command to List REST

The OSGI command to list REST and Swagger URLs is lrestdoc, which lists the following discoveryURL:

<>@BWEclipseAppNode> lrestdoc

[Application Name]: tibco.bw.sample.binding.rest.BookStore.application

[Discovery Url]

The following are the commands to list endpoints.

<>@BWEclipseAppNode> lendpoints

[Application Name] : tibco.bw.sample.binding.rest.BookStore.application

[Endpoint Type] : REST

[Endpoint URL] : http://localhost:8123

[CLIENT FORMAT ] : JSON

[RESOURCE PATH ] : /book/{ISBN}

[HTTP METHODS] : GET, PUT, DELETE




[RESOURCE PATH ] : /books

[HTTP METHODS] : POST, GET




[RESOURCE PATH ] : /book/{ISBN}/events

[HTTP METHODS] : GET




[RESOURCE PATH ] : /event/{EventID}

[HTTP METHODS] : GET, PUT, DELETE




[RESOURCE PATH ] : /events

28


[HTTP METHODS] : POST, GET

Rest Service WizardRest Service Wizard is used to create new Businessworks Rest Resource or add Rest Services to anexisting resource.

The Rest Service Wizard has the following fields:

Field Description

Resource Name The name of the ActiveMatrix Businessworks REST Resource.

Summary The summary or description of the REST Resource.

Resource ServicePath

The relative path for this REST Service.

Type of Resource This field has two options: Collection or Single.

For example, Books is a collection resource and Book is a single resource. Thisis dictated by the schema element used in the Resource Schema field.

Resource Schema The XSD schema element to be used for creating the REST resource.

You can also use this to create the input and output of each operationdefined. You can override this on the next screen if required, for eachoperation.

29


Field Description

Operations These are the HTTP methods implemented by this REST Service.

Currently TIBCO ActiveMatrix Businessworks only supports POST, GET ,PUT and DELETE methods for users to implement.

Implementation Data The implementation data field can be Structured or Opaque.

● Structured: The XSD element structure is preserved for the input andoutput of every operation. You need not manually parse the payload togenerate the actual element to be used in the process.

● Opaque: Use this mode to apply the pass through mechanism. A usergets a messageBody element in the input or output of every operationand needs to use either Parse activities for JSON or XML to get aStructured output for the payload.

To add additional services to an ActiveMatrix Businessworks process, click the Create A Rest Service

icon on the top left of the process canvas.

SOAP BindingYou can use SOAP binding to create service providers and service consumers, based on the SOAPprotocol. TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks 6.x supports SOAP 1.1 and SOAP 1.2 protocol. Messagescreated by SOAP binding can either use HTTP or JMS transport for communication. Depending uponwhether you want to create a service provider or a service consumer, there are two types of SOAPbindings: SOAP Service Binding and SOAP Reference Binding.

TerminologyTIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks uses specific terminology to identify the purpose of the message,that is exchanged between a service provider and a service consumer.

Terms Used For SOAP Messages

The following table describes the terms used to describe a SOAP message.

Term Description

ServiceRequest A request message received by a service provider

ServiceReply The response message sent by a service provider

ReferenceRequest A request message generated by a service consumer

ReferenceReply A response message received by a service consumer

SOAP Headers

Refer to the following table for the terminology used to described different configurations that can beused to create a SOAP Header.

30


Term Description

Described Described denotes that the WSDL message definition used to create a SOAPheader is available in the concrete WSDL.

Undescribed Undescribed denotes that the WSDL message definition used to create aSOAP header is not available in the concrete WSDL.

Bound Specifies that the SOAP header definition is a part of the same WSDLmessage definition, that is also used to create a SOAP body definition. Insuch cases, a WSDL message contains multiple parts. Some parts are used asSOAP header and others are defined to describe the SOAP body.

Unbound Specifies that the SOAP header definition belonging to a WSDL message isnot used to describe the SOAP body.

Based on the definitions in the SOAP Headers table, SOAP headers can be categorized into any of thefollowing three types of configurations:● Described bound headers● Described unbound headers● Undescribed unbound headers

SOAP Attachments

Refer to the following table for SOAP attachment types and their relevant description.

SOAP AttachmentTypes Description

Described BoundAttachments

In this configuration, a part of the input or output WSDL message of typebase64binary is configured as an attachment. In a concrete WSDL, theattachment is described as a mime part of the multipart message.

UndescribedUnboundAttachments

None of the parts of the WSDL input or output message is configured to bean attachment. The concrete WSDL does not indicate whether an attachmentis in the input or output.

You can map an attachment at binding level in the mimePart config, only atdesign time.

SOAP Service BindingUsing SOAP service binding you can create a service provider through SOAP protocol.

Binding


Field Description

Name The name of the service binding.

Description A short description of the service getting exposed.

31


Field Description

Target Namespace The Target Namespace of the service. This Target Namespace is used inthe concrete WSDL for the external clients.

Generate Concrete WSDL

The SOAP service binding helps you to create the concrete WSDL using Concrete WSDL GenerationWizard. To generate the WSDL, do the following.

1. Click Generate Concrete WSDL.

2. In the Concrete WSDL Generation Wizard, the Location field shows Workspace and File Systemtabs.

3. Click the Workspace tab to create the WSDL in your workspace and specify a location where WSDLis to be created.

4. To select location:

a. Click the Workspace tab if you want to create the WSDL in your workspace and select alocation. It is recommended to select the Service Descriptor folder to contain all project relatedWSDLs.

b. Click File System tab if you want to save the concrete WSDL on a disk location other than theworkspace.

Click Finish if you want to generate WSDL with default settings.

5. The File Name field shows the name of the WSDL, for example BooksService_gen.wsdl. Overrideit as per requirement.

6. Click Next.

7. Select the Embed Abstract WSDL and Embed Schema check boxes on the next screen. (Thefollowing image is of SOAP over HTTP binding.)

32


By default the Embed Abstract WSDL and Embed Schema check boxes are selected.

With Embed Abstract WSDL check box selected, the concrete WSDL generated has an abstractWSDL content in it.

In this case, the namespace of the concrete WSDL is the same as that of an abstract WSDL. If thecheck box is not selected, then the namespace of the concrete WSDL is different than that of theabstract WSDL.

When you select Embed Schema check box, the concrete WSDL generated has the schema definition(mentioned in the abstract WSDL) in it.

In this case, schema import is done only at first level. That is, if the schema mentioned in theabstract WSDL imports any other schema, the concrete WSDL will not have that embedded schema.

To avoid any namespace resolution error in the application module: If the concreteWSDL is placed in a workspace location (as mentioned in the earlier step), clear theEmbed Abstract WSDL check box.

8. For advance configuration of the concrete WSDL such as Namespace URI, Service Name, Host, andPort (for SOAP over HTTP), click the Advance tab. Override them as per requirement.

9. Click Finish.

SOAP Default Configuration


Field Description

SOAP Version The version of the SOAP specification: 1.1 or 1.2. The default is 1.1.

Style The SOAP binding style. Specify either Document or RPC style.

33


Field Description

Encoding Encoding is literal. The two attachment styles available are - SwA andMTOM.

The MTOM attachment style is available only if SOAP 1.2specification is used.

Transport Configuration


Field Description

Transport Type The transport over which SOAP message needs to be sent. HTTP andJMS transports are supported.

Connector Name The name of the shared resource. This points to either the HTTP or JMSshared transport configuration.

Application for HTTP Transport

Endpoint URI The endpoint of the service through which SOAP clients can access theservice.

Application for JMS Transport

34


Field Description

Acknowledge Mode The acknowledge mode for incoming messages. It can be one of thefollowing:

● Auto: The message is acknowledged when it is received by a SOAPservice binding.

● Client: The message is not acknowledged when it is received by theSOAP service binding. You can confirm the message by using the Confirm activity in the BusinessWorks process that is configured asan operation implementation. If the Confirm activity is not used, themessage is automatically acknowledged by the SOAP service bindingduring the SOAP reply.

● Dups OK:The message is acknowledged automatically when it isreceived by a SOAP binding. JMS provides this mode foracknowledgment in due course, but ActiveMatrix BusinessWorksacknowledges messages upon receipt.

● Tibco EMS Explicit: (only available for TIBCO Enterprise MessageService™)

The message is not acknowledged when it is received by a SOAPservice binding. You can confirm the message by using the Confirmactivity in the ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks process that isconfigured as the operation implementation.

If the Confirm activity is not used, then the message is automaticallyacknowledged by the SOAP service binding during Service reply.The session is not blocked and one session handles all incomingmessages for each process instance.

● Tibco EMS Explicit Dups OK: (only available for TIBCO EnterpriseMessage Service)

The message is not acknowledged when it is received by a SOAPservice binding. You can confirm the message by using the Confirmactivity in the Activematrix BusinessWorks process that is configuredas the operation implementation.

If the Confirm activity is not used, the message is automaticallyacknowledged by SOAP service binding during Service reply.The session is not blocked and one session handles all the incomingmessages for each process instance. The messages however, areacknowledged in due course.

JMS Message Type Specifies the type of the incoming messages on the specified destination.It can be either Text message or Bytes message.

Messaging Style Specifies the style of the incoming messages on the specified destination.It can be Generic, Queue, or Topic.

JMS Destination Specifies the name of the destination for the incoming JMS messages.The syntax of the destination name is specific to the JMS provider youare using.

35


Field Description

JMS ApplicationProperties

User-defined JMS Properties expected to be available in the incomingmessage.

JMS ApplicationProperties (Response)

User-defined JMS Properties expected to be sent in the outgoingmessage.

Max Sessions When the Acknowledge Mode field is set to Client, this field displays tospecify the maximum number of JMS sessions created for the incomingSOAP messages.

When a JMS queue message is received, the session is blocked until themessage is acknowledged. You can specify a maximum number of newsessions to create to handle incoming messages. The acknowledgment isreceived when the process completes.

After reaching the maximum number of sessions, no new incomingmessages can be processed. After an incoming message is confirmed, thetotal number of active sessions decreases and another incoming messagecan be processed.

Persistence Configuration


Field

LiteralValue/ModuleProperty Description

Persistence Type None Select any one from the available Persistence configurationtypes. They are NONE and File.

Selecting the File option displays the Directory, CreateDirectories, and Threshold Size fields.

Directory Yes The directory to write attachments that exceed the specifiedthreshold size.

CreateDirectories

Yes Creates new directories if not already present on the disk.

Threshold Size Yes The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming messageattachment that can be kept in memory. Attachments larger thanthe specified size are written to a file in the specified directory.

The file name is the output, so that subsequent activities in theprocess can access the file and read its contents.

Threading Policy Details

The following are the details for the SOAP Service Binding threading policy.

36


Activity TypeMulti-Threaded? Default Thread Count Thread Count Configuration

Transport: HTTP

ProcessStarter

Yes● Minimum thread pool

threads = 10● Maximum thread pool

threads = 75

It can be configured on the HTTPConnector shared resource using thefollowing fields:

● Minimum ThreadPool threads● Maximum ThreadPool threads

SOAP Reference BindingUsing SOAP reference binding you can create a service consumer using SOAP protocol.

Binding


Field Description

Name The name of the reference binding.

Description A short description of the HTTP reference binding.

WSDL Service Specifies the service name and its target namespace.

WSDL Port Specifies the binding implemented by the service. If more than oneimplementation is available in concrete WSDL, select an appropriateimplementation.

SOAP Version The version of the SOAP specification: 1.1 or 1.2.

Attachment Style The attachment style for the incoming and outgoing messages. Thefollowing attachment styles are available:

● SwA● MTOM

The attachment style MTOM is available only if the activity uses SOAP 1.2and is not displayed when SOAP 1.1 is used.

Transport Configuration


Field Description

Transport Type The transport over which the SOAP message is sent. HTTP and JMStransports are supported.

37


Field Description

Connector Name The name of the shared resource. This may point to either HTTP or JMSshared transport configuration.

Application for HTTP Transport

Default Host/Port Specifies the default host and port configuration available in theconcrete WSDL.

Application for JMS Transport

JMS Destination Specifies the name of the destination for the incoming JMS messages.The syntax of the destination name is specific to the JMS provider youare using.

Messaging Style Specifies the style of the incoming messages on the specified destination.It can be Generic, Queue, or Topic.

JMS Message Type Specifies the type of the incoming messages on the specified destination.It can be either Text Message or Bytes Message.

Delivery Mode The delivery mode of messages.

● Persistent Messages are stored and forwarded.● Non-Persistent Messages are not stored and can be lost due to

failure.

The default is Persistent.

Expiration The length of time a message can remain active. 0 means that themessage does not expire.

Priority The priority of the message. Priority is a value from 0-9. Higher numberssignify a higher priority (that is, 9 is a higher priority than 8).

The default is 4.

JMS ApplicationProperties

The user-defined JMS Properties required to be available in theincoming message.

JMS ApplicationProperties(Response)

The user-defined JMS Properties required to be sent in the outgoingmessage.

Persistence Configuration


38


Field


Persistence Type None Select any one from the available persistence configurationtypes.

● None● File

Selecting the File option displays the Directory, CreateDirectories, and Threshold Size fields.

Directory Yes The directory to write attachments that exceed the specifiedthreshold size.

CreateDirectories

Yes Creates new directories if not already present on the disk.

Threshold Size Yes The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming messageattachment that can be kept in memory. Attachments larger thanthe specified size are written to a file in the specified directory.

The file name is the output, so that subsequent activities in theprocess can access the file and read its contents.


The following are the details about the SOAP Reference Binding threading policy.

ActivityType

Multi-Threaded?

Default ThreadCount Thread Count Configuration

Transport: HTTP

Asynchronous

Yes● Core pool size = 5● Max pool size =10

You can either configure it by using theThread Pool shared resource or byproviding it in the config.ini using thefollowing properties:

● com.tibco.bw.palette.http.request

response.threadpool.coresize

● com.tibco.bw.palette.http.request

response.threadpool.maxsize

39


File Palette

The File palette is used to read, write, delete, or create files. You can use the process starter present inthis palette to poll for files and start a process based on the available file.

Copy FileThe Copy File is a synchronous activity that you can use to copy files and directories to a new location.

General


Field

Literal Value/ProcessProperty/ModuleProperty Description

Name None The name to be displayed as the label of the activity in theprocess.

From Filename Yes The path and name of the file or directory to copy.

For directories, you must specify an absolute path. You mayuse wildcards when specifying files within a directory.

For example, to copy a directory, specify c:\myDirectory.To copy all text files in a directory, specify c:\myDirectory\*.txt.

To Filename Yes The destination for the copy operation. This must be anabsolute path.

Do not use wildcard characters in this element.

Overwrite Literal Value Select this check box to overwrite the existing file with thesame name, if it exists.

The activity raises an exception if the specified file ordirectory exists and this check box is not selected.

Create Non-Existing Directories

Literal Value When this check box is selected, the activity creates alldirectories in the specified path, if they do not already exist.

If this check box is not selected with non-existing one ormore directories in the specified path, it throws an exception.

Include Sub-Directories

Literal Value Includes all sub-directories in the source directory, when thesource to copy is a directory.

Description


40


Input



fromFilename string The path and name of the file or directory to copy.

For directories, specify an absolute path. You may usewildcards when specifying files within a directory. Forexample:

● To copy a directory, specify c:\myDirectory.

● To copy all text files in a directory, specify c:\myDirectory\*.txt.

toFilename string The destination for the copy operation. This must be anabsolute path and wildcards cannot be used in thiselement.

The Input field always takes precedence for all File palette activities with respect to the field equivalenton the General tab.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for more informationabout error codes and the corrective action to take.

Fault Thrown When..

FileNotFoundException The file does not exist. The source file or the destination isnot found and the Create Non-Existing Directories checkbox is not selected on the General tab.

IllegalCopyException The destination exists but its type is different than the typeof the specified source.

For example, in the activity input, fromFileName is adirectory and toFileName is a file.

FileAlreadyExistsException The file already exists at the destination where you areattempting to copy the file and the Overwrite field is notselected on the General tab.

FileIOException There is an input/output error. For example, the file ordirectory already exists and it is write-protected.

Create FileThe Create File is a synchronous activity that creates a new file or directory with the specified name.When creating a file, you can also provide the file contents.

General


41


Field

LiteralValue/ProcessProperty/ModuleProperty? Description

Name None The name to be displayed as the label for the activity in theprocess.

Filename Yes The path and name of the file to create.

Select the Is a Directory check box on the General tab tospecify the name of the directory to create.

Overwrite None Overwrites the existing file with the same name, if it exists.

The activity throws an exception, if the specified file existsand this check box is not selected.

Is a Directory None When this check box is selected, the activity creates adirectory instead of a file.

Create Non-Existing Directories

None When this check box is selected, the activity creates alldirectories in the specified path, if they do not already exist.

If this check box is not selected and one or more directoriesin the specified path do not exist, it throws an exception.

Description

Provide a short description of the activity.

Input



fileName string The path and name of the file to create.

Select the Is a Directory field check box on the General tab to specifythe name of the directory to create.

Output



fileInfo complex The element containing fullName, fileName, location,configuredFileName, type, readProtected, writeprotected, size,and lastModified

fullName string The name of the file or directory, including the path information

42



fileName string The name of the file or directory without the path information

location string The path to the file or directory

configuredFileName?

string This element is optional and it is not populated by this activity

type string The type of the file

readProtected boolean Signifies whether the file or directory is protected from reading

writeProtected boolean Signifies whether the file or directory is protected from writing

size integer The size of the file (in bytes)

lastModified string The time stamp indicating when the file was last modified

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions thrown by this activity. See TIBCO ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks Error Codes for more information about error codes and the corrective action to take.

Fault Thrown When..

FileAlreadyExistsException The file already exists at the destination where you areattempting to copy the file. The Overwrite check box isnot selected on the General tab.

FileIOException There is an Input/Output error. For example, the file ordirectory already exists and is write-protected.

File PollerThe File Poller activity is a process starter activity that polls for files or directories with the specifiedname and starts a process, when a change (creation, modification, or deletion) is detected.

General


Field


Name None The name to be displayed as the label for the activity in the process.

43


Field


Filename Yes The path and name of the file or directory to monitor.

You can also use wildcard characters to monitor a directory for filesthat match the provided specification. For example, C:\files\*.log must match any change to a file in the files directory withan extension of .log.

PollingInterval(sec)

Yes The polling interval (in seconds) to check for the specified file.

IncludeExisting Files

None Check for the specific file among the files that existed before theprocess engine starts.

● When selected - the existing file matching the specification inthe Filename field creates a new process instance, when aprocess engine starts.

● When not selected - any existing file matching the specificationin the Filename field is ignored, unless there is a change in thefile.

Exclude FileContent

None Specifies not to load the data from the file into this activity’soutput. If selected, the contents of the file are not available to thesubsequent activities in the process.

Content as Yes The type of content in the file which can be either Text or Binary.

Encoding Yes The character encoding for the file (when Text is specified in theContent as field).

Description


Advanced

The Advanced tab has the following fields.

Field Description

Sequence Key This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies which processesshould run in order. Process instances with sequencing keys that evaluateto the same value are executed sequentially in the order the processinstance was created.

Custom Job Id This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies a custom ID forthe process instance.

44


Field Description

Poll for Create Events Select this check box to start a new process when a file or directorymatching the specification in the Filename field is created.

If not selected, the newly created files or directories are ignored.

Poll for Modify Events Select this check box to start a new process when a file or directorymatching the specification in the Filename field is modified.

If not selected, the modifications to the files or directories are ignored.

Poll for Delete Events Select this check box to start a new process when a file or directorymatching the specification in the Filename field is deleted.

If not selected, deletions of files or directories are ignored.

Include Sub-Directories

Select this check box to enable monitoring of the events that occur insubdirectories of the specified directory.

If not selected, only the directory is monitored and subdirectories areignored.

Mode Select the type of polling to perform from the following modes in the drop-down list:

● only-directories: only tracks the specified changes for directories.● only-files: only tracks the specified changes for files.● files-and-directories: tracks the specified changes for both files and

directories.

Sort by Specifies the order in which the files should be processed, if more than onefile is detected. You can sort by File Name, Date Modified, or None.

The files are processed as the polling interval occurs. Hence, the Sort Byfield applies to all files that have changed since the last polling interval.The field is useful for processing the files in a specific order when theprocess engine starts and the Include Existing Files field is selected (thenall existing files are processed in the specified order).

The File Poller activity starts process instances based on thespecified Sort By order, but the process instances may notcomplete in the same order. If you want to guarantee thatprocesses start and complete in a specified order, specify MaxJobs = 1 and enable the Activation Limit field when you deployyour project.

Sort Order Specifies whether the order specified in the Sort By field is Ascending orDescending. This field is only applicable if the Filename or DateModified is selected in the Sort By field.

Conversations


45


Output


Output item Datatype Description

action string The occurred event to trigger the File Poller activity. The possiblevalues are: create, remove, or modify.

timeOccured integer The time when the File Poller activity detected the change in the file.

The time is defined as the amount of time in milliseconds. Forexample, since midnight, January 1, 2013 UTC.

fileInfo complex This element contains the fileName, location, type, readProtected,writeProtected, and size data.

fullName string The name of the file, including the path information.

fileName string The name of the file without the path information.

location string The path to the file.

configuredFileName?

string The name of the file or directory this activity is configured to operateon.

type string The file type.

readProtected boolean Whether the file is read-protected.

writeProtected boolean Whether the file is write-protected.

size integer The size of the file in bytes.

lastModified string The timestamp indicating when the file was last modified.

fileContent complex The element containing the textContent and binaryContent data.

textContent string The content of the file (text files), if the Exclude File Contents checkbox is not selected on the General tab.

binaryContent binary The content of the file (binary files), if the Exclude File Contentscheck box is not selected on the General tab.

encoding string The character encoding for the file.

List FilesThe List Files activity is a synchronous activity that returns information about files or directories, or alisting of all the files in the specified directory.

General


46


Field



Filename Yes The path and name of the file or directory to monitor.

You can also use wildcard characters to monitor a directory forfiles that match the provided specification. For example, C:\files\*.log must match any change to a file in the files directory withan extension of .log.

Mode None The type of listing you want to retrieve. You can select from thefollowing options:

● Only Files● Only Directories● Files and Directories

Description

Provide a short description for this activity.

Input



fileName string The path and name of the directory with files or subdirectories to list.Providing a file or directory name returns the information about thatfile or directory. You can use wildcards to list files or directories thatmatch the provided specification. For example:

● C:\files\*.log lists any file in the files directory that have a .logextension.

● C:\files\mylogs\*.* lists all files in the directory mylogs.

Output

The following is the output of the activity.

47



fileInfo complex Element containing the fullName, fileName, location,configuredFileName, type, readProtected, writeProtected, size,and lastModified data.

This is a repeating element. Each item in the element is a file ordirectory included in the specified directory matching theprovided criteria.


fileName complex The name of the file without the path information.

location string The name of the file or directory this activity is configured tooperate on.

configuredFileName

string The path to the file.

type string The type of the file.

readProtected boolean Specifies whether the file is read-protected.

writeProtected boolean Specifies whether the file is write-protected.


lastModified string The timestamp indicating when the file was last modified. Youcan compare values in this element using the compare-dateTime()XPath function.

For example, compare-dateTime($List-Files/ListFilesActivityOutput/files/

fileInfo[fileName="myFile.txt"]/lastModified,current-

dateTime())

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

FileNotFoundException The file does not exist and the specified path is either incorrector not found..

Read FileThe Read File activity is a synchronous activity that is used to read a file and place its contents into theoutput of the activity.

General


48


Field



Filename Yes The name of the file.

Exclude FileContent

None Specifies not to load the data from this file into the output of theactivity.

If selected, the contents of this file are not available to thesubsequent activities in the process.

Read as Literal Value This field is available only if the Exclude File Content check box isnot selected.

The type of the content in the file. It can be either Text or Binary.

Description

Provide a short description about the activity.

Input

The following is the input of the activity.


fileName string The name and path of the file to read.

encoding string The character encoding of the text files.

This element is available only when the Read as field on the General tabis set to Text.

You can specify the encoding names supported by Java in this element. Ifthis element is not specified, the default encoding of the Java VirtualMachine used by the process engine is used.

Output


Output ItemDatatype Description

fileInfo complex This element contains fullName, fileName, location, type,readProtected, writeProtected, size, and lastModified data.

fullName string The name of the file with the path information.


49




configuredFileName

string An optional element. It is not populated by this activity.






fileContent complex The element containing the textContent data.

textContent string The content of the file (text files), if the Exclude File Content checkbox is not selected on the General tab.

binaryContent binary The content of the file (binary files), if the Exclude File Content checkbox is not selected on the General tab.

encoding string The character encoding for the file when the value specified in theRead as field in the General tab is Text.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

FileNotFoundException The file does not exist.

UnsupportedEncodingException The content of the text file is invalid, and the content of thefile is read into the process data.

FileIOException An input/output exception occurred when trying to read thefile.

Remove FileThe Remove File activity file is a synchronous activity that removes the specified files from thedirectory. If the specified directory is not empty, it throws an exception.

General


50


Field

Literal Value/ProcessProperty/ModuleProperty? Description

Name None The name of the file to be displayed as the label of the activity in theprocess.

fileName Yes The path and name of the file to be removed from the directory.

Description


Input



fileName string The path and name of the file to be removed from the directory.

Output



fileInfo complex This element contains the fullName, fileName, location, type,readProtected, writeProtected, size, and lastModified data.

fullName string The name of the file (or empty directory) and the file pathinformation.

fileName string The name of the file (or empty directory) without file pathinformation.

location string The path to the file or the empty directory.

ConfiguredFileName

string An optional element. This element is not populated by this activity.


readProtected boolean Specifies whether the file (or empty directory) is read-protected.

writeProtected boolean Specifies whether the file (or empty directory) is write-protected.

size integer The size of file in bytes.


51


Fault


Fault Thrown When..


FileIOException An input/output exception occurs, when trying toremove the file or empty directory.

Rename FileThe Rename File activity is a synchronous activity that is used to rename or move files. This activitycan also rename directories. However, you cannot use this activity to move the directory to a newlocation.

General

The General tab consists of the following fields.

Field


Name None The name to be displayed as a label of the activity in the process.

From Filename Yes The path and name of the file to rename or move, or the path andname of the directory to rename.

The value in this element must be an absolute path.

To Filename Yes The new name and location of the file or directory. The files canbe moved to a new location, but the directory location remainsunchanged.

The value of this element must be an absolute path.

Overwrite None Select this check box to overwrite the existing file with the samename when renaming or moving.

If not selected, the activity raises an exception, if the specified fileor directory exists.

Create Non-ExistingDirectories

None When this check box is selected, the activity creates all directoriesin the specified path, if they do not already exist.

If not selected and one or more directories in the specified path donot exist, it throws an exception.

52


Description


Input



fromFileName

string The path and name of the file to rename or move, or the path andname of the directory to rename.

The value in this element must be an absolute path.

toFileName string The new name and location of the file or directory. The files can bemoved to a new location, but the directory location remainsunchanged.

The value of this element must be an absolute path.

Output



fileInfo complex This element contains the fullName, fileName, location, type,readProtected, writeProtected, size, and lastModified data.

fullName string The name of the file (or directory) including the path information.

fileName string The name of the file (or directory) without the path information.

location string The path to the file or the directory.

configuredFileName

string An optional element. This element is not populated by thisactivity.




size integer The size of file in bytes.


Fault


53


Fault Thrown When..


IllegalRenameException The destination file exists and its type is different than thetype of the source file.

FileAlreadyExistsException The file already exists.

FileIOException An input/output exception occurred when trying to renamethe file or directory.

This exception is also encountered while attempting to movea directory.

Wait for File ChangeThe Wait for File Change activity is a signal-in activity that waits for a file creation, modification, ordeletion event to occur during the process execution. When this activity is executed, the processinstance suspends and waits for the specified change to occur before resuming.

General


Field



Filename Yes The name and path of the file to poll for. Use to locate anexisting file.

You can also use wildcards to monitor a directory for files thatmatch the applied specification. For example, C:\files\*.logmatches any change to a file in the files directory with anextension of .log.

PollingInterval (sec)

Yes The polling interval (in seconds) to verify the changes in thespecified file.

54


Field


IncludeExisting Files

None Select this check box so that you can select the file among the filesthat existed prior to the starting of process engine.

● When selected: if an existing file matches the specification inthe Filename field on process engine start, the Wait for FileChange activity accepts the file as changed and proceeds tothe next activity.

● When not selected: any existing file with matchingspecification in the Filename field is ignored, until there arechanges in the file.

Exclude FileContent

None Specifies not to load the data from the file into the output of theactivity.

If this field is selected, the contents of the file are not available tothe subsequent activities in the process.

Content as Literal Value The type of the content in the file. It can be either Text or Binary.

Encoding Yes The character encoding of the file.

This field is available only when Text is specified in the Contentas field.

Description


Event

The Event tab has the following fields.

Field Description

Event Timeout (sec) This field specifies the amount of time in seconds. If no value is specified inthis field, the message waits indefinitely. If zero is specified, the event isdiscarded immediately, unless this activity has already been executed.

Activity Timeout(msec)

A file change may occur before this activity is executed.

This field specifies the amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait if the filechange occurs before this activity is executed in the process instance. If theevent timeout expires, an error is logged and the event is discarded.

Conversations

You can initiate or join the conversation here. To initiate multiple conversations, click the Add New

Conversation button. To join multiple conversations, click the Join Existing Conversation button.

55


For details about conversations, refer to Application Development guide.

Output

The following is the output for this activity.


action string The occurred event to trigger the File Poller activity. Thepossible values are: create, remove, or modify.

timeOccured integer The time when the Wait for File Change activity detectedthe change in the file.

The time is defined as the amount of time in milliseconds.For example, since midnight, January 1, 2013 UTC.


fileName string The file name without the path information.


configuredFileName


type string The type of the file.





fileContent complex The element containing the textContent data.

textContent string The content of the file (text files), if the Exclude FileContents check box is not selected on the General tab.

binaryContent binary Contents of the file (binary files), if the Exclude FileContents check box is not selected on the General tab.

encoding string The character encoding for the file.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

ActivityTimedOutException The timeout is attained.

56


Write FileThe Write File activity is a synchronous activity that writes content to the specified file.

General


Field



Filename Yes The path and name of the file.

Wildcards are not permitted in this field.

Append None Appends the contents to an existing file. Not selecting this checkbox overwrites the file.

Write as Literal Value Specify whether Text or Binary.


None When selected, the activity creates all directories in the specifiedpath, if they do not already exist.

If this check box is not selected with one or more non-existingdirectories in the specified path, it throws an exception.

Compress None This field specifies whether to compress the output file using GZipformat. Specify None for no compression or GZip for acompressed output file.

When you specify GZip for this field, rename the file to usethe .gz suffix and use gunzip to decompress the file.

Description

Provide a short description for this activity.

Input



fileName string The path and name of the file.


textContent string The contents of the file (text files).

57



addLineSeparator

boolean This specifies whether to add a carriage return after each inputline.

encoding string The character encoding for text files.

This element is available only when Text is specified in theWrite as field on the General tab.

You can specify encoding names supported by Java in thiselement. If this element is not specified, the default encoding ofJava Virtual Machine is used.

Output



fileInfo complex This element contains the fileName, location, type,readProtected, writeProtected, and size data.




configuredFileName







Fault


Fault Thrown When..


UnsupportedEncodingExcepti

on

The encoding is not valid.

58


Fault Thrown When..

FileIOException An input/output exception occurs when trying to write to the file.

59


FTL Palette

ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks applications can use FTL palette to send and receive messages. TIBCOFTL transfers messages from publishers to subscribers over transports. TIBCO FTL offers differenttypes of transports. TIBCO FTL uses the concept of an endpoint to abstract the transports details,thereby insulating the application program from the complexity of transport details.

Important: You must install TIBCO FTL, if you want to use the FTL palette features. Ensure thatFTL_HOME environment variable is set. Read the TIBCO FTL Concepts manual to understand generalFTL concepts.

FTL PublisherFTL Publisher is a synchronous activity that publishes (sends) a message over a transport that isabstracted through a TIBCO FTL application endpoint. The transport details are not configured in theFTL Publisher activity, instead it is configured in TIBCO FTL Realm Server.

General


Field


Name No The name to be displayed as label of the activity in theapplication.

FTL Realm ServerConnection

Yes The shared resource containing information for connecting toTIBCO FTL Realm Server. See FTL Realm Server Connectionfor more details.

Endpoint Yes TIBCO FTL application endpoint which is an abstraction forthe underlying transports on which the FTL Publisheractivity sends messages. The endpoint can have more thanone transport.

Click the Browse button to locate the endpoints defined onthe TIBCO FTL Realm Server.

60


Field


Format No Defines the set of fields in the message that is sent by the FTLPublisher activity. The form of each FTL message (its fieldnames and their value datatypes) is governed by a format.The supported formats are:

● Custom: can be defined by using the Input Editor. TheInput Editor is enabled only for the Custom formatoption.

● Keyed Opaque: is a built-in format that contains a textkey field and a binary (opaque) data field.

● Opaque: is a built-in format that contains a binary(opaque) data field.

● Predefined: is already defined in the TIBCO FTL RealmServer for the FTL application. The Predefined formatrequires a format name and this can be obtained from theTIBCO FTL Realm Server using the Browse button.

Format Name Yes The name of the Predefined or Custom format.

This field is displayed when the Custom or Predefinedformat is selected.

In addition, selecting the Predefined format enables theBrowse button. Click the Browse button to obtain thepredefined formats from the TIBCO FTL Realm Server.

Description

Provide a short description of the activity here.

Input Editor

The Input Editor gets enabled only when Custom format is chosen in the General tab. The schemamust match the schema of the input for the activity shown on the Input tab.


MessageType complex The message type used in the application.

From the Schemas folder, drag the Message :MessageType element on to the process editor.

Input

The input for the activity depends on the Format you select in the General tab. If you select the Customformat, the input is a data element defined in the Input Editor tab.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions thrown by this activity.

61


Fault Thrown when...

FTLPublisherActivityFault FTL Publisher fails to publish a message due to a runtime error.

FTLCreateMessageFault The FTL message could not be created.

FTLSendMessageFault The FTL message could not be published.

FTL ReplyFTL Reply is a synchronous activity that can send reply to message received through the FTLSubscriber activity.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as label of the activity in the application.

Reply For Specifies the FTL Reply message for FTL Subscriber.

Format Defines the set of fields in the message that is sent by the FTL Replyactivity. The form of each FTL message (its field names and their valuedatatypes) is governed by a format. The supported formats are:

● Custom: can be defined by using the Input Editor. The Input Editoris enabled only for the Custom format option.

● Keyed Opaque: a built-in format that contains a text key field and abinary (opaque) data field.

● Opaque: a built-in format that contains a binary (opaque) data field.● Predefined: is already defined in the TIBCO FTL Realm Server for

the FTL application. The Predefined format requires a format nameand this can be obtained from the TIBCO FTL Realm Server usingthe Browse button.

Format Name The name of the Predefined or Custom format.

This field is displayed when the Custom or Predefined format isselected.

In addition, selecting the Predefined format enables the Browse button.Click the Browse button to obtain the predefined formats from theTIBCO FTL Realm Server.

Description


Input Editor

The Input Editor gets enabled only when you select Custom format in the General tab. The schemamust match the schema of the input for the activity shown on the Input tab.

62



MessageType complex The message type used in the application.

From the Schemas folder, drag the Message :MessageType element on to the process editor.

Input

The input for the activity depends on the Format chosen by the user in the General tab. If you select theCustom format, the input is a data element defined in the Input Editor tab.

Fault



FTLReplyActivityFault The FTL Reply activity fails to reply due to a runtime error.

FTLCreateReplyMessageFault The FTL reply message could not be created.

FTLSendReplyMessageFault The FTL reply message is not published.

FTL Request ReplyFTL Request Reply is an asynchronous activity that is used to send a request to an FTL applicationendpoint and wait for a response.

General


Field


Name No The name to be displayed as label of the activity in theapplication.


Yes The shared resource containing information for connecting toTIBCO FTL Realm Server. See FTL Realm Server Connectionfor more details.

Endpoint Yes TIBCO FTL application endpoint which is an abstraction forthe underlying transports on which the FTL Request Replyactivity sends messages. The endpoint can have more than onetransport.

Click the Browse button to locate the endpoints defined on theTIBCO FTL Realm Server.

63


Field


Request Format No Defines the set of fields in the message that is sent by the FTLRequest Reply activity. The form of each FTL message (itsfield names and their value datatypes) is governed by a format.The supported formats are:

● Custom: can be defined by using the Input Editor. TheInput Editor is enabled only for the Custom format option.


Selecting the Custom field, enables the Input Editor.

Request FormatName

Yes The name of the Predefined or Custom format.


Reply Format Yes Defines the set of fields in the message that is sent by the FTLRequest Reply activity. The form of each FTL message (itsfield names and their value datatypes) is governed by a format.The supported formats are:

● Custom: can be defined by using the Input Editor. TheInput Editor is enabled only for the Custom format option.

● Keyed Opaque: is a built-in format that contains a text keyfield and a binary (opaque) data field.

● Opaque: is a built-in format that contains a binary (opaque)data field.


Reply FormatName

Yes The name of the Predefined or Custom format.

This field is displayed when the Custom or Predefined formatis selected.

In addition, selecting the Predefined format enables theBrowse button. Click the Browse button to obtain thepredefined formats from TIBCO FTL Realm Server.

Description


64


Advanced


Field



Yes It is the amount of time FTL Request Reply activity waits toget the reply from the FTL Subscriber.

The default activity Timeout is 30000 msec.

Input Editor

The Input Editor gets enabled only when Custom format is chosen in the General tab. The schemamust match the schema of the input for the activity shown on the Input tab.

Output Editor

The Output Editor tab defines the schema to use for reply messages. This tab gets enabled only whenyou select the Custom format.

Input

The input for the activity depends on the Format you select in the General tab. If you select Customformat, the input is a data element defined in the Input Editor tab.

Output

Shows the output reply message. For example, if you select Predefined as a Reply Format, the outputshows the Predefined message with the message metadata and reply message.

Fault


Fault Thrown When...

FTLRequestReplyActivityFau

lt

The FTL Request Reply activity fails due to a runtime error.

FTLCreateRequestMessageFau

lt

The FTL request message could not be created.

FTLSendRequestMessageFault The FTL request message could not be published.

FTLProcessReplyMessageFaul

t

The FTL reply message could not be processed.

ActivityTimedOutException The timeout is reached.

65


FTL SubscriberThe FTL Subscriber is a process starter activity that starts the process based on the receipt of a messageover a transport that is abstracted through a TIBCO FTL application endpoint. The transport details arenot configured in the FTL Subscriber activity, instead it is configured in TIBCO FTL Realm Server.

General


Field


Name No The name to be displayed as the label of the activity inthe application.


Yes The shared resource containing information forconnecting to an FTL Realm Server and creating aRealm object. See FTL Realm Server Connection formore details.

Endpoint Yes TIBCO FTL application endpoint which is anabstraction for the underlying transports on which theFTL Subscriber activity receives messages. Theendpoint can have more than one transport.

Click the Browse button to locate the endpoints definedon the TIBCO FTL Realm Server.

Content Matcher Yes Specifies FTL Subscriber activity's interest in messagesbased on their content. The syntax for example is, {"My-Long":123}.

A content matcher selects a subset of messages from amessage stream according to the fields and values inthose messages.

66


Field


Format No Defines the set of fields in the message that is sent bythe FTL Publisher activity. The form of each FTLmessage (its field names and their value datatypes) isgoverned by a format. The supported formats are:

● Custom: can be defined by using the Input Editor.The Input Editor is enabled only for the Customformat option.

● Keyed Opaque: is a built-in format that contains atext key field and a binary (opaque) data field.

● Opaque: is a built-in format that contains a binary(opaque) data field.

● Predefined: is already defined in the TIBCO FTLRealm Server for the FTL application. ThePredefined format requires a format name and thiscan be obtained from the TIBCO FTL Realm Serverusing the Browse button.

Format Name Yes The name of the format of the FTL Subscriber message.


Description


Advanced


Field


Subscriber Name Yes Specify the name of the subscriber on the TIBCO FTLRealm Server.

67


Field


Acknowledge Mode Yes The acknowledge mode for subscriber messages. It canbe one of the following:

● Auto: When this mode is used, the FTL libraryautomatically acknowledges the message when theapplication callback returns.

● Explicit: When this mode is used, the user needs touse a Confirm activity in the ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks process to explicitly acknowledgethe message.

Queue DispatcherThreads

Yes Specifies the number of threads to use for dispatchingevents from the FTL event queue.

Queue Size Yes Size of FTL event queue.

Queue OverflowPolicy

Yes This field is enabled when the queue size is greaterthan zero. Select any one from the following availableoptions:

● Discard None● Discard New● Discard Old

Thread Pool Size Yes Must be greater than zero. By default, the equivalent ofhalf of the ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks engine threadpool is created.

For example, if the ActiveMatrix BusinessWorksengine thread pool is set to eight, then the FTLSubscriber activity creates four threads for processingthe incoming FTL message.

Sequence Key No This field can contain an XPath expression thatspecifies which processes should run in sequence.Process instances with sequencing keys that evaluateto the same value are executed sequentially as theprocess instance was created.

Custom Job Id No This field can contain an XPath expression thatspecifies a custom ID for the process instance.

Output Editor

The Output Editor tab defines the schema to use for incoming messages. This tab gets enabled onlywhen you select the Custom format.

68


Conversations

You can initiate the conversation here. Click the Add New Conversation button to initiate multipleconversations. Refer to Application Development guide for more information on conversation.

Output

The output for the activity depends on the Format you select in the General tab. If you select theCustom format, the output is a data element defined in the Output Editor tab.

69


FTP Palette

The FTP palette is used to issue FTP commands.

FTP Change Default DirectoryFTP Change Default Directory is a synchronous activity that changes the current default directory onthe remote machine to the specified directory path.

General


Field

LiteralValue/ModuleProperty/ProcessProperty? Description


FTPConnection

Yes The path to the shared configuration resource containing the userinformation such as host name, port, username, and password.

Quit (post-command)

None Select this check box to specify that the FTP connection should beclosed after completing this command.

The FTP Connection remains open, if this check box in notselected. As a result, all the FTP activities that specify the same FTPsession (that is, the same host, port, username, and password),share the FTP session until the connection is closed.

Description


Input

The Input tab has the following fields.


Host string The name of the FTP server.

This overrides the value specified in the FTP Connection property.

Port integer The port number for incoming FTP requests on the FTP server.


Username string The username for logging into the FTP server.


70



Password string The password for logging into the FTP server.


NewDefaultDir

string The path to the new default directory on the FTP server.

Timeout integer The amount of time to wait for the FTP server to respond. Thistimeout is used, when the FTP server places the FTP connectionused by this activity into a waiting state.


Output

This activity produces no output.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for more informationabout error codes and the corrective actions to take.

Fault Thrown When..

CommandExecutionException An error occurred while executing the FTP command.

ConnectionErrorException An error occured while connecting to the FTP server.

FTP Delete FileFTP Delete File is a synchronous activity that issues an FTP delete or mdelete command to delete oneor more files from the remote server.

General


Field

LiteralValue/ModuleProperty? Description


FTPConnection

Yes The path to the shared configuration resource containing the userinformation such as host name, username, and password.

Quit (post-command)

None Select this check box to specify that the FTP Connection should beclosed after completing this command.

The FTP connection remains open, if this check box in not selected.As a result all the FTP activities that specify the same FTP session(that is, the same host, port, username, and password), share theFTP session until the connection is closed.

71


Description


Input







UserName string The username for logging into the FTP server.




RemoteDirectory

string An optional element. The path to the directory containing the files tobe deleted.

This element is concatenated with the RemoteFileName element toprovide the complete path to the files to be deleted.

RemoteFileName

string The path and name of the file to delete on the remote server. Thisfield permits wildcards (? for any one character, * for one or morecharacters).

You can specify an absolute or relative path for the remote filename. Relative paths are relative to the path specified in theRemoteDirectory element or in the user’s home directory, ifRemoteDirectory is null.

Timeout integer This timeout is used, when the FTP server places the FTPConnection used by this activity, into a waiting state.

Output


Fault


Fault Thrown When..

CommandExecutionException An error occured when executing the FTP command.

72


Fault Thrown When..

ConnectionErrorException An error occured when connecting to the FTP server.

FTP DirFTP Dir is a synchronous activity that provides a sequential list of files in the specified directory of theFTP server.

General

The Genaral tab has the following fields.

Field



FTPConnection


Quit (post-command)


The FTP connection remains open, if this check box in not selected.As a result, all FTP activities that specify the same FTP session (thatis, the same host, port, username, and password), share the FTPsession until the connection is closed.

NLST None Selecting this check box specifies to use the NLST command insteadof the DIR command.

The DIR command produces verbose output including the file size,modification time, and permissions.

NLST produces only a list of file names.

Description


Input





73



Port integer The port number for the incoming FTP requests on the FTP server.






DirParameters

string The command parameters to pass to the DIR or NLST command.

Directory string An optional parameter. The path to the directory in which youwant to list the files.

If null, the current remote directory is listed.

Timeout integer The amount of time to wait for the FTP server to respond. Thistimeout is used, when the FTP server places the FTP connectionused by this activity into a waiting state.


Output



ItemCount integer The number of entries returned from the remote directory listing.

DirectoryItems

string A repeating element containing the list of items returned.

Fault



CommandExecutionException An error occurred while executing the FTP command.

ConnectionErrorException An error occured while connecting to the FTP server.

FTP GetFTP Get is a synchronous activity that issues an FTP get or mget command to the specified server. Thecontent of the remote files can be placed in the output of the activity or written directly to the localstorage. If you select to place the contents of a remote file into the output of the activity, you can onlyretrieve one remote file (FTP get command) and the file’s content is stored in memory as part of the

74


output of the activity. If you write the contents of the retrieved files to the local storage, you canretrieve one or more files (FTP get or mget commands).

General


Field



FTPConnection


Quit (post-command)


The FTP connection remains open, if this check box in not selected.All the FTP activities that specify the same FTP session (that is, thesame host, port, username, and password), can share the FTPsession until the connection is closed.

Use ProcessData

None Specifies to write contents of the file retrieved from the FTP serverto the process data.

The output of the activity includes an element that contains theremote file’s contents, and the data can be used by subsequentactivities in the process.

Caution: Do not use this option if you are retrieving multiple files.You can only write one files's contents to this output of theactivity. Selecting this check box with wildcards specified in theRemoteFileName input element, returns an error.

Binary None Specifies whether to retrieve the file content in binary or ASCIImode (selected signifies binary).

Using ASCII mode automatically handles the differences in lineendings between the FTP server and the machine executing theFTP command.

The ASCII mode implies text data. This text data can be encodedin a character encoding other than ASCII (such as UTF-8 orLatin-1).

Description


Input


75



RemoteFileName

string The path and name of the file to retrieve from the remote server.Wildcards (? for any one character, * for one or more characters) arepermitted in this field.

You can specify an absolute or relative path for the remote filename. Relative paths are relative to the path specified in theRemoteDirectory element or the current directory, ifRemoteDirectory is null.

Do not specify wildcards for this element, if Use ProcessData check box is selected.

LocalFileName string This input item is available only if the Use Process Data check boxon the General tab is not selected and only one remote file isretrieved.

This input item specifies the name and path of the local file for thecontents of the retrieved file to be written.

If more than one remote file is retrieved, the local files are named tomatch the remote file names.





Username string The username for logging into the FTP server.




Encoding string When the retrieved file is not binary and the Use Process Data checkbox on the General tab is selected, this specifies the characterencoding of the retrieved file.

If this is not specified, it is assumed that the encoding of the file isthe same encoding of the machine where the FTP command isexecuted. If the encoding of the local machine and the FTP serverare different, specify the encoding used by the FTP server in thiselement and the activity converts the retrieved file into the localmachine’s encoding.

Timeout integer The amount of time to wait for the FTP server to respond.

This timeout is used when the FTP server places the FTP connectionused by this activity into a waiting state.

Output


76


OutputItem Datatype Description

FileTransferred

complex When one or more remote files are retrieved and written to the localstorage, this element contains a list of the retrieved remote filenames.This element contains the following two elements:

● Name● NumOfBytes

If an error occurs while retrieving the files, the activity output is notavailable. However, the Fault tab lists the successfully transferred filesand the files that failed to be transferred.

Name string The name of the retrieved remote file.

NumOfBytes

integer The number of bytes comprised in the associated file name.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the following possible exceptions thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for moreinformation about error codes and the corrective actions to take.

Fault Thrown When..

GetFilesException An error occurred during the FTP get operation.

ConnectionErrorException An error occurred when connecting to the FTP server.

CommandExecutionException An error occurred when executing the FTP command.

ConnectionTimeoutException The connection to the FTP server is timed out before thecommand execution is complete.

FTP Get Default DirectoryFTP Get Default Directory is a synchronous activity that retrieves the name of the current remotedirectory. The default remote directory is operating system dependent and determined by the remoteFTP server. On UNIX systems, the default remote directory is usually the home directory of the useraccount that is used to establish an FTP connection.

General


77


Field



FTPConnection


Quit (post-command)

None Select this check box to specify that the FTP Connection shouldbe closed after completing this command.

The FTP connection remains open if this check box in not selected.All the FTP activities that specify the same FTP session (that is,the same host, port, username, and password), can share the FTPsession until the connection is closed.

Description


Input












This timeout is used when the FTP server places the FTP connectionused by this activity into a waiting state.


Output


78



CurrentDirectory

string The directory currently set on the remote FTP server.

By default, this directory is set by the FTP server. However, you canuse the FTP Quote activity to issue an FTP command to change toanother directory.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..


ConnectionErrorException The connection to the FTP server is timed out before thecommand execution is complete.

FTP Make Remote DirectoryFTP Make Remote Directory is a synchronous activity that creates the specified directory on theremote server.

General

The General tab consists of the following fields.

Field



FTPConnection


Quit (post-command)


The FTP connection remains open, if you do not select this checkbox. All the FTP activities that specify the same FTP session (that is,the same host, port, username, and password), can share the FTPsession until the connection is closed.

Description


Input


79




This overrides the value specified in the FTP Connectionproperty.

Port integer The port number for the incoming FTP requests on the FTPserver.






RemoteSITECommand

string An optional element. This is a system-specific command toexecute before creating the directory.

ParentRemoteDirectory

string An optional element. The path to the remote directory to create.

This element is concatenated with the RemoteDirName elementto provide the complete path to the directory to create.

RemoteDirName

string The name of the remote directory to create.

You can optionally include the complete path of the directory tocreate.


This timeout is used when the FTP server places the FTPconnection used by this activity into a waiting state.


Output


Fault


Fault Thrown When..



80


FTP PutFTP Put is a synchronous activity that issues an FTP put or mput command to the specified server. Youcan use the process data as the file content to send to the remote server or send the files to the local diskstorage. Select Use Process Data to place only one file on the remote server (FTP put command). To uselocally stored files for placing more than one files on the remote server (FTP mput command).

General


Field



FTP Connection Yes The path to the shared configuration resource containing the userinformation such as host name, username, and password.

Quit (post-command)


The FTP connection remains open, if you do not select this checkbox. All the FTP activities that specify the same FTP session (thatis, the same host, port, username, and password), can share theFTP session until the connection is closed.

Use ProcessData

None Specifies to use the process data as the file content to place on theremote server.

Select this check box to place only one file on the remote server.

Binary None Specifies whether to send the file content in binary or ASCIImode (selected signifies binary).

When ASCII mode is used, the differences in line-endingsbetween the FTP server and the machine executing the FTPcommand are automatically handled. This mode also implies textdata, and that data can be encoded in a character encoding otherthan ASCII (such as UTF-8 or Latin-1).

Append None This element specifies whether to append the data to an existingfile. Select this checkbox to append the data to the file, if thespecified file exists on the FTP server.

If not selected, the file is overwritten if it exists on the FTP server.

81


Field


Timeout (msec) None The amount of time to wait (in milliseconds) for the FTP server torespond.



Description


Input



RemoteFileName

string The path and name of the file to place onto the remote server.


LocalFileName

string The path and name of the local file to use in the FTP put command.

This element is available only if the Use Process Data field is notselected.







Password string The password for logging into the FTP Server.





82


Output



FileTransferred

string A repeating string element containing a list of names of files that weretransferred. This element contains the following two elements:

● Name● NumOfBytes

If an error occurs while transferring files, the activity output is notavailable. However, the Fault tab lists the successfully transferred filesand the files that failed to be transferred.

Name string The name of the retrieved remote file.

NumOfBytes

integer The number of bytes comprised in the associated file name.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

PutFilesException An error occurred during the FTP Put operation.



ConnectionTimeoutException The connection to the FTP server is timed out before thecommand execution is complete.

FTP QuoteFTP Quote is a synchronous activity that sends an arbitrary command to the FTP server. FTPcommands vary by their operating system, FTP version, and configuration. Before using this activity,check for the availability of the commands on the remote server.

General


83


Field


Name None The name to be displayed as label of the activity in the process.

FTPConnection


Quit (post-command)



Has SocketData

None If selected, the FTP server returns the data as a result of executingthe command.

Description

Provide a short description of this activity.

Input

The following is the input for this activity.










RemoteSITECommand

string Optional. The system-specific command to be executed beforethe executing the specified command.

84



ValidReturnCodes

string The optional list of valid return codes to validate the reply.Codes are three-digit numbers.

To specify multiple codes, separate each code with a comma or aspace.

If the remote server returns a code not specified in this list, theactivity raises an exception.

RemoteCommand

string The command to be executed on the remote FTP server.




Output



CommandItems

string Each element in this repeating element is a returned value fromthe command executed on the remote server.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

CommandExecutionExceptio

n

An error occurred when executing the FTP command.


FTP Remove Remote DirectoryFTP Remove Remote Directory is a synchronous activity that deletes the specified directory from theremote FTP server.

General


85


Field



FTPConnection


Quit (post-command)



Description


Input











ParentRemoteDirectory

string An optional element. The path to the remote directory you wantto remove.

This element is concatenated with the RemoteDirName elementto provide the complete path to the directory to remove.

86



RemoteDirName

string The name of the remote directory you want to remove.

You can optionally include the complete path of the directory toremove.




Output


Fault


Fault Thrown When..



FTP Rename FileFTP Rename File is a synchronous activity that renames the specified file on the remote FTP server.

General


Field



FTPConnection


87


Field


Quit (post-command)



Description


Input











OldRemoteDirectory

string An optional element. The path to the remote file you want torename.

This element is concatenated with the OldRemoteFileNameelement to provide the complete path to the file to rename.

OldRemoteFileName

string The name of the remote file you want to rename.

You can optionally include the complete path of the file torename.

88



NewRemoteDirectory

string An optional element. The new path for the file to rename.

This element is concatenated with the NewRemoteFileNameelement to provide the complete path to the file to rename.

NewRemoteFileName

string The new name for the remote file.

You can optionally include the complete path of the file.




Output


Fault


Fault Thrown When..



FTP SYS TypeFTP Sys Type is a synchronous activity that retrieves the operating system of the FTP server.

General


Field



FTPConnection


89


Field


Quit (post-command)


The FTP connection remains open, if you do not select this checkbox. All the FTP activities that specify the same FTP session (that is,the same host, port, username, and password), can share the FTPsession until the connection is closed.

Description


Input











Timeout string The amount of time to wait for the FTP server to respond.



Output



SystemType string The FTP server type.

90


Fault


Fault Thrown When..

CommandExecutionExcepti

on

An error occurred when executing the FTP command.

ConnectionErrorExceptio

n

An error occurred when connecting to the FTP server.

91


General Activities

General Activities palette comprises various general purpose activities and process starters. Forexample, Timer, a process starter activity, is used to start a process at a specific time.

AssignAssign is a synchronous activity. You can use this activity to assign a value to a process-definedvariable. The Assign activity is used to assign a value to the process-defined as well as scope-definedvariables. Ensure to set all the essential values when using the Assign activity to set a process variable.

General


Field Description


Process Variable toSet

A drop-down list of the available user-defined process variables for theprocess.

Select any user-defined process variable to modify.

Description


Input


<schema> The specified data schema for the user-defined process variable selected onthe General tab.

Output

The schema for the output is determined by the schema specified for the process variable.

Call ProcessThe Call Process is an asynchronous activity that calls and executes an existing process.

General


Field Description


Service The endpoint of the service provided by the sub-process.

92


Description


Conversations


Input



input varies The input to the called process is defined in the OutputEditor tab of the Start activity of the called process.

Output



output varies The output of the called process is defined in the InputEditor tab of the End activity of the called process.


The following are the details for the Call Process activity threading policy.

Activity TypeMulti-Threaded?


Asynchronous

No Not applicable. Not applicable.

CheckpointCheckpoint is an asynchronous activity that executes a checkpoint in a running process instance. Acheckpoint saves the current process data that can be recovered, if the event fails. If a process enginefails, all the process instances can be recovered and resume the execution of their last checkpoint in theprocess. Configuring the process engine to checkpoint data for the failed process helps optionally, torecover the process instance at a later stage. This happens if the process fails due to an exception thatcannot be handled or terminated manually.

General


Field Description


93


Field Description

Timeout This field specifies the amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait before andafter the checkpoint. If a process engine fails, all the process instances canbe recovered. These recovered process instances resume the execution oftheir last checkpoint in the process.

Duplicate Key A key value that is used to compare with other process instances todetermine whether another process instance with the same duplicateKeyvalue already exists.

Description


Checkpoints and Confirm ActivityIn the case of confirmable messages (for example, a confirmable TIBCO Rendezvous® is received),consider the consequences of performing a checkpoint before or after a Confirm activity.

If the checkpoint is taken before the Confirm activity, a crash occurs after a checkpoint but before aconfirm, the original message is resent. In this case, the restarted process can no longer send theconfirmation. However, a new process is started to handle the resent message, and you can implementyour process to handle the restarted and new processes appropriately.

If the checkpoint is taken after a Confirm activity, there is potential for a crash to occur after the confirmbut before the checkpoint. In this case, the message is confirmed and therefore not redelivered. Theprocess instance is not restarted, because the crash occurred before the checkpoint.

You must consider the type of processing your process performs to determine when a checkpoint isappropriate if your process receives confirmable messages.

ConfirmConfirm is a synchronous activity that confirms any confirmable message received by the processinstance.

General


Field Description


ConfirmEvent The message you want to confirm.

This is a drop-down list of any process starter or activity awaiting anincoming event in the current process.

You can confirm messages only from the reliable sources, for example, JMSmessages. E-mail is also confirmable when received by the Receive Mailprocess starter (the e-mail message is deleted from the server when it isconfirmed).

Select only the event that sent the confirmable message.

94


Description


External CommandExternal Command is a synchronous activity that executes the command on the operating system. Thisactivity waits for the command to complete before transition to the next activity. Optionally, thecommand output and errors can be included in this activity's output schema, written to a file, or both.

General


Field


Name None The name to be displayed as a label for the activity in aprocess.

Command ToExecute

Yes The command line to execute. You can also specify anyinput and command-line arguments to the command inthis field.

You cannot specify more than one command by pipingoutput from one command to another (for example, ls |more is not allowed).

ProvideCommandOutput

Yes Selecting this check box specifies that the output sent to thestandard output and standard error by command isavailable in the output schema of this activity.

Caution: Do not select the check box for the commandsthat produce a large amount of output. Instead, write theoutput to a file. This saves memory and you can use otheractivities, such as Read File and Parse Data, to handle theoutput file more efficiently.

RemoveParameter Quotes

Yes If this check box is selected, the quotes surrounding theparameters are removed. The quotes are removed even ifthe parameter contains space(s).

By default, this check box is not selected.

Output Filename Yes The name and location of the file for storing any output orerrors produced by the command. If this field is blank, nooutput file is created.

95


Field


Output LineSplitting

Yes Controls whether the command output and errors are splitinto multiple strings.

Select any one from the following available options:

● None: This activity produces a single string containingthe command’s output or errors. This string includesline end characters.

● At Operating System Line End: This activity producesa repeating string element with one string element peroutput line. The lines are split by default on the carriagereturn/line feed character, depending on the operatingsystem. The line end characters are not included in theoutput.

● At Specified Token: The lines are split wherever thespecified token occurs. The token is specified as anactivity input element, and the token is not included inthe output.

Description


Input

The following is input for this activity.


command string The command to execute, including any input or command-linearguments.

Specifying this input item overrides the command specified on theGeneral tab.

input string An input string to supply to the command’s standard input.

This schema item attains the same result as entering the commandfrom a command prompt and then typing the input withoutspecifying a carriage return.

outputFile string The file containing the output produced by the command for sendingit to stdout.

96



environment string The environment variable settings used to run the command. Thiselement is specified as a comma-separated list of <name>=<value>pairs where:

● <name> is the name of the environment variable● <value> is the value of the environment variable

If no value is specified for this element, the command is executedwith the environment variable settings specified in the login scripts,for the user account used to execute the process engine.

If a value is specified, the value of this element replaces anyenvironment settings for the user account used to run the processengine.

That is, the user environment is ignored and this element’s value isused instead.

workingDirectory

string The working directory for the command process.

If not specified, the command process inherits its working directoryfrom the process engine.

Output



returnCode integer The numeric return code returned by the command.

Typically, a value of 0 (zero) in this element signifies a successfulcommand execution.

A non-zero value usually indicates termination of the commanddue to an error.

output string Any output produced by the command and sent to stdout. Thisoutput item is available only when you select the ProvideCommand Output check box on the General tab.

This is a repeating element, if the line split configuration settingcauses the command’s output to be split into several lines.

error string Any errors produced by the command and sent to stderr. Thiselement is only available if you select the Provide CommandOutput check box on the General tab.

This is a repeating element, if the line split configuration settingcauses the command’s output to be split into several lines.

Fault


97


Fault Thrown When..

CommandExecutionError The command could not be executed.

FileIOError There was an error when attempting to write the output to afile.

Ensure that the user running the BusinessWorks engine, hasthe write permission to the output file.

InvalidInputException An error in the activity’s configuration or input mappingprevents the command from being executed.

Get Shared VariableGet Shared Variable is a synchronous activity that retrieves the current value of a module sharedvariable or job shared variable. To use this activity to retrieve the value of a shared variable, use aCritical Section group to ensure that no other process instances alter the value of the shared variable atthe same time.

General


Field Description


Inline Specify the type of shared variable (Module Shared Variable or Job SharedVariable).

Shared Variable The module shared variable or job shared variable whose value you want toretrieve.

Description

Provide a short description here.

Output



schema The value of the shared variable specified in the Shared Variable field ofthe General tab is the output for this activity.

The schema for the output is determined by the schema specified for theshared variable.

98


InspectorInspector activity is used to write the output of any or all activities and module properties to a file orstdout. This is particularly useful when debugging processes and you want to see the entire schemainstead of mapping specific elements to the Write File activity.

You can use the Inspector activity to write the output of any activity or module properties in thecurrent process. Activities and module properties in a subprocess are not available to the Inspectoractivity (but the output of a Call Process activity can be written using the Inspector activity). If youwant to obtain the output from one or more activities or module properties in a subprocess, place theInspector activity in the process of the subprocess.

General


Field Description


Inspect The output of the processes you want. Select any one from available items onthe drop-down list to output.

● All● ModuleProperties● _processContext

Only activities that have output and are executed prior to the Inspectoractivity are visible in the drop-down list.

Stdout Specifies whether the output of this activity should be sent to stout (standardoutput). Select this check box to send the output to stdout.

If this check box is not selected, the output is not sent to stdout.

Append to File Select this check box to specify that the output is appended to the filespecified in this activity’s input.

Not selecting this check box overwrites any file that exists with the specifiedname.

Suppress Header Select this check box to suppress the output of header information, such as theprocess instance ID and the timestamp.

If this check box is not selected, the header information for the current processinstance is written before the output of the activity or module property.

Description


Input


99



fileName string The absolute path to the file you want to write. This filecontains the output of the specified activity or moduleproperty.

Output

The following is the output of this activity.


output string The output of the module property or activity specifiedon the General tab in string form.

You can use this output in subsequent activities, inaddition to writing the output to a file or stdout. Forexample, you can use this output as the body of aTIBCO Rendezvous message.

LogLog is a synchronous activity that writes a message to the log. For each AppNode and application,there is a log file.

General


Field Description


Logger Name Specifies the name of a message category. The value of the logger-name iscase-sensitive and can be a single name or a hierarchical name.

Log Level Select one of the following log levels recognized by the process engine.

● Error: logs error conditions and messages.● Warning: is the warning message of an unexpected error in the process.● Info: logs informational messages highlighting the application/engine

progress.● Debug: can be used for debug-level messages.

Suppress Job Info If selected, no additional information is added to the log entry.

If not selected, each log message prepends JobId, ProcessInstanceId, ActivityName, Document Update: December 2014 and Version, Deployment UnitName, and Version name to the message text.

Description


100


Input


Input Iten Datatype Description

msgCode string The error code of the message. This is used as an identifier for themessage so that applications can scan the log for the message.

loggerName string The name of a message category specified in the Logger Name fieldin the General tab.

logLevel string The log level specified in the Log Level field in the General tab.

message string The message to be displayed in the log.

When the message contains non-ASCII data, the defaultencoding of the Java Virtual Machine used by the processengine is used for text encoding, when writing to the logfile.

MapperMapper is a synchronous activity that adds a new process variable to the process. This variable can bean inline schema, primitive element, or a complex element. You can map the data values from thecurrent list of process variables to the elements of the variable with the Mapper activity.

General

Specify the name of the activity here.

Description

A short description of the activity.

Input Editor

The Input Editor tab defines the structure of the process variable to add to the process. You can use asimple datatype, or you can define a group of data elements on this tab.

You can also reference XML schema stored in the project. The data specified here becomes the inputand output schema of the Mapper activity. This data is then available to other activities in the process.

Input

The input for the activity is defined by the specified data elements on the Input Editor tab.

Output

The output for the activity is defined by the specified data elements on the Output Editor tab.

Set Shared VariableSet Shared Variable is a synchronous activity that you can use to change the value of a shared variable.

General


101


Field Description


Inline Specify the type of the shared variable (Module Shared Variable or JobShared Variable).

Shared Variable The module shared variable or job shared variable whose value you want toretrieve.

Description


Input



schema The value of the shared variable specified in the Shared Variable field ofthe General tab is the input for this activity.

The schema for the input is determined by the schema specified for theshared variable.

Output



schema or no output The value of the shared variable specified in the Shared Variable field ofthe General tab is the output for this activity.

The schema for the output is determined by the schema specified for theshared variable.

SleepSleep is an asynchronous activity that suspends the process on the current transition for the specifiedtime. For a process with multiple control flows, only the current execution branch of the process issuspended.


The following are the details about the Sleep activity threading policy.

102




Asynchronous

No 1 Not applicable.

The activity does not create simultaneousprocess instances due to the single threadingmechanism. You cannot alter the default threadcount for this activity.

General


Field Description


Description


Input



IntervalInMillisec

integer The amount of time interval, in milliseconds, to suspend thecurrent branch of the process.

TimerTimer is a process starter activity that starts the process at a specific time. You can also specify theprocesses to be started periodically.

General


Field

Literal Value/ModuleProperty/ProcessProperty? Description


103


Field


Start Time Yes The day and time to start the process. To run the processperiodically, the start time indicates the first time to run theprocess.

The local machine’s time zone is used to determine the processstart. If the project is running on machines in different time zones,the time zone of the machine where the project was saved, isused. Use a process property in this field to provide start timesrelative to the time zone where the project is deployed. If youprovide a process property for this field, the format of thespecified time must be: yyyy MMM dd HH:mm:ss z

Run Once None Indicates this process should be run only once on the day andtime indicated by the Start Time field.

If you do not select this check box, the Time Interval and IntervalUnit fields are displayed that you can use to specify the frequencyof the process.

TimeInterval

Yes The integer indicating the number of units specified in theInterval Unit field. For example, if a value of 1 is specified andthe Interval Unit field is specified as Hour, a new process isstarted every hour beginning at the time specified in the StartTime field.

● If a value of 2 is specified and the Interval Unit field isspecified as Month, a process is started every other month,beginning at the time specified in the Start Time field.

● If the value specified is less than one second (1000milliseconds), the timer ignores the specified interval and istriggered once every second.

Using Literal Value, Module Property, and ProcessProperty in this field, specifies the time interval inmilliseconds and the Interval Unit field is notdisplayed.

Interval Unit None The unit of time to use with the Time Interval field to determinehow often to start a new process. The units can be: Millisecond,Second, Minute, Hour, Day, Week, Month, and Year.

104


Field


End After None Specify the number of occurrences or the end time here. Selectfrom the following available options:

● Never: Click the Never radio button if you want tocontinuously execute the process instance. For example, if theTime Interval value specified is 5 and the Interval Unitspecified is Second, the process instance executes every 5seconds.

● Occurrences: Clicking the Occurrences radio button displaysthe Occurrences field. Specify the number of occurrences ofthe process instance execution. This field can be configuredwith Literal Value, Module Property, and Process Property.

● End Time: Clicking the End Time radio button displays theEnd Time field. Specify the end time and date when you wantthe process to end. This field can be configured with LiteralValue, Module Property, and Process Property.

Description


Advanced


Field Description

Sequencing Key This field contains an XPath expression that specifies which processes shouldrun in sequence. Process instances with sequencing keys evaluating to the samevalue, are executed sequentially in the sequence the process instance wascreated.

Custom Job Id This field contains an XPath expression that specifies a custom job ID for everyjob in the process instance.

Conversations


Output


105



TimerOutputSchema

The time the process instance started.

The time is represented by several items in the output schema indicating:

● Now● Hour● Minute● Second● Week● Month● Year● Date● Time● DayOfMonth

Each of these items uses the appropriate datatype.


The following are the details about the Timer activity threading policy.



ProcessStarter

No 1 Not applicable.

The Timer process starter does not generatemultiple events concurrently. You cannot alterthe default thread count for this activity.

106


HTTP Palette

Using the HTTP Palette you can send and receive HTTP requests.

HTTP ReceiverHTTP Receiver is a process starter activity that starts the process based on the receipt of an HTTPrequest.

General


Field

Literal Value/ModuleProperty/Processproperty? Description


HTTPConnection

Yes The HTTP Connector resource describes the characteristics ofthe connection used to receive incoming HTTP requests.

See HTTP Connector for more information about specifyingshared resources.

Context Path

Path Spec

Yes This is the prefix of a URL path that is used to select thecontexts to which an incoming request is passed.

You can either specify both Context Path and Path Spec, any,or none of these elements. For example, the path displays asthe http://hostname.com/contextPath/pathSpec format.

If the Context Path is not specified, the context path isreferred to as the root context.

Output Style None The type of output. It can be either String or Binary.

Parse PostMethod Data

None Specifies to parse the message body of the HTTP request intoa schema for the output of the activity.

When this check box is selected, the parameters specified inthe Parameters field are used to validate the incomingrequest and parse it into the output schema.

For an incoming GET request, there is no messagebody, hence this field has no effect on the incomingGET requests.

107


Field

Literal Value/ModuleProperty/Processproperty? Description

Parameters None The parameters of the incoming HTTP request.

If you specify parameters in this table, the incoming request isparsed and represented as a schema in this output of theactivity. For each parameter, you must provide a name,datatype, and whether the field is Optional, Required, orRepeating.

Use the and buttons to the right of the parameter tableto add and remove parameters.

Specifying parameters in this field parses the querystring of the request into the output schema,regardless of whether the Parse Post Method Datacheck box is selected. Selecting the Parse PostMethod Data check box and specifying parametershere is required to parse the message body alongwith the query string of the request.

HTTPAuthentication

None Specifies that the client sending the HTTP request must beauthenticated. The user name and password specified in theincoming request must exist in the LDAP server configuredon HTTP Connector.

Expose SecurityContext

None Places the information from the user’s security context (eitherauthentication or SSL certificate information) into the Contextor SecurityContext output element.

This is a fairly expensive operation and SSL certificates canconsume memory resources. Hence, select this option only ifyou require information from the user’s security context forlater use in your process.

DefaultEncoding

Yes Specifies the encoding to use if no charset is specified in theContent-Type header of the message. This encoding is usedfor the message body and URL.

However, when URIEncoding is specified in the HTTPConnector shared resource, the Default Encoding parameterspecified here applies to the contentType alone and not to theURIEncoding property.

Description


Advanced


108


Field

ProcessProperty/ModuleProperty? Description

Write to File None Select this check box to write incoming requests that exceedthe specified threshold size to a file instead of storing therequest in memory. You can accept large incoming requestswithout consuming a great deal of memory. Selecting thischeck box displays the Directory, Creating Non-ExistingDirectories, and Threshold Data Size(bytes) fields.

This option is not intended to be used with theParse Post Method Data option on the Generaltab. When you select Write to File, the PostDataoutput element becomes a choice elementcontaining either the output FileName or thePostData. This depends upon whether the dataexceeds the size specified in the Threshold DataSize field. It is recommended to use either theWrite to File option or the Parse Post MethodData option, but not both at the same time.

Not selecting this field keeps the incoming requests inmemory.

After writing, the files created using this optionare not deleted automatically. You must managethe storage used by these files and delete themwhen they are no longer used.

Directory Yes The directory to write messages that are above the specifiedthreshold. The process engine does not attempt to create thedirectory if the specified directory does not exist. Therefore,create the directory before starting the process engine.


None When this check box is selected, all directories in the pathspecified in the Directory field are created, if they do notalready exist.

If this check box is not selected and there are one or moredirectories in the specified path in the Directory field thatdo not exist, an exception is raised.

Threshold DataSize(bytes)

Yes The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming request thatcan be kept in the memory. Requests larger than thespecified size are written to a file in the specified directory.The file’s name is output so that subsequent activities in theprocess can access the file and read its contents.

Specify zero (0) in this field for all incoming requests to besaved to a file.

109


Field


Sequence Key None This field can contain an XPath expression that specifieswhich processes should run in sequence. Process instanceswith sequencing keys that evaluate to the same value areexecuted sequentially in the sequence the process instancewas created.

Custom Job Id None This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies acustom ID for the process instance.

Special Characters in HTTP Requests

Depending upon the content type of the data for the request, the request can contain URL-encoded dataand the server is expected to decode the data. For example, an incoming request may have thefollowing message body:

name=John%20Smith&address=500%201%2F2%20Main%20Street

If the message body is not parsed (Parse Post Method Data check box is not selected on the Generaltab), the body of the message remains URL-encoded in the PostData output element. If the messagebody is parsed, the data is decoded before being placed in the PostData output element, and thatelement would display as follows:

name=John Smith&address=500 1/2 Main Street

The sequence of the parameters may not be the same in the PostData output element as the sequence inthe original HTTP request sent by the client when the message body is parsed.

The PostData output element can contain different data and be a different length depending uponwhether the message body is parsed. Hence, ensure that you obtain data from the parameters outputelement when the message body is parsed.

Output Editor

The Output Editor tab describes the data structure for the headers of the HTTP request. You can usethe default structure, or you can alter the structure, if the incoming request has a specific data structurefor the header of the request.

The header structure is defined by the HTTP protocol. See the HTTP protocol specification for moreinformation about the fields and content of the header of an HTTP request. You can obtain thisspecification at www.w3.org.

Output HeaderElement Datatype Description

Accept string This field specifies media types that are acceptable forresponse messages for the incoming request. For example,text/*,text/html. Media types are described in the HTTPspecification.

If no Accept-Header field is present, it is assumed that theclient accepts all media types.

110


http://www.w3.org/

Output HeaderElement Datatype Description

Accept-Charset string This field specifies the character sets that are acceptable forresponse messages for the incoming request. For example,iso-8859-5, unicode-1-1. Character sets are described in theHTTP specification.

If no Accept-Charset header is present, it is assumed that theclient accepts any character set.

Accept-Encoding

string This field specifies the content-coding values that areacceptable for response messages. For example, compress,gzip. See the HTTP specification for more information aboutthis header field.

Content-Type string This field indicates the media type of the entity body sent tothe receiver. For example, text/html; charset=ISO-8850-4.Media types are described in the HTTP specification.

Content-Length string This field indicates the size of the entity body (in decimalnumber of OCTETs) sent to the receiver.

This field takes into account the encoding of the messagebody. See Special Characters in HTTP Requests for moreinformation on when the message body is URL encoded.

Connection string Using this field the requestor can specify options required forthis connection. For example, the option close specifies thatthe requestor would like the connection to be closed when therequest is complete.

Cookie string See the HTTP specification for more information about thisfield.

If you want to receive more than one cookie, set thecardinality for this field to repeating (*).

Pragma string This field is used to include implementation-specific directivesthat might apply to the receiver. See the HTTP specificationfor more information about using this field.

Conversations


Output



Method string The method specified in the request. For example, GET orPOST.

111



RequestURI string The address portion of the request. This is the portion beforethe question mark (?).

HTTPVersion string The version field of the HTTP request.

PostData orBinaryContent orFileName

string The message body of the HTTP request. The content of thiselement depends upon whether the message body is parsed.Parsing behavior is controlled by the Parse Post MethodData field on the General tab.

See Special Characters in HTTP Requests for moreinformation.

If the Write to File field is selected on the Advanced tab, andthe incoming message exceeds the specified threshold size,thePostData field can also contain the file name of the filecontaining the message.

QueryString string The query string portion of the request. This is the portionafter the question mark (?).

Header string The header of the HTTP request.

Protocol string This can be HTTP or HTTPS depending upon the protocolused by the request.

Port string The port number on which the request was received. This isthe port number configured in the HTTP Connector resource.

Headers complex The fields of the header specified on the Output Editor tab.See the description of the Output Editor tab for moreinformation about these items.

Parameters complex The parameters for the incoming request. These parametersare configured in the Parameters field on the General tab.

When the Parse Post Method Data check box on the Generaltab is selected, the parameters include the parameters in thequery string and message body of the incoming HTTPrequest.

When the Parse Post Method Data check box is not selected,the parameters include only the query string of the incomingrequest.

112



DynamicHeaders complex The dynamic header is an additional header parameter toadd runtime headers to the outgoing HTTP messages. Thiselement is specified in the Output Editor tab. TheDynamicHeaders consists of the following information:

● Name: the name of the header● Value: the value of the header

The following overriding conditions can be considered:

● Overrides the value of HeaderName with the value foundin DynamicHeaders, if it is a non-repeating header. Ifmore than one occurrence of this header is found underDynamicHeaders, it throws the "The header[ headerName ] is defined as non-Repeating

Header in Input Headers. This header cannot

have multiple occurences in DynamicHeaders."

exception.● If it is a repeating element, add the respective name value

pairs under dynamic headers, which is added to theexisting list maintained for this element.

● For a repeating element, if the new header name is notfound under the "Headers" section declared throughTIBCO Business Studio, the following is added into theHTTP Headers.

— Shows only one value, if found once inDynamicHeaders.

— Shows array of values, if found repeating inDynamicHeaders.

mimeEnvelopeElement

complex This element contains the message attachments.

This element contains a repeating element named mimePartthat contains each mime attachment.

113



mimeHeaders complex This element contains the mime header for each mimePart.Mime headers can contain the following information:

● content-disposition: To suggest a filename for anattachment, use "*;filename=<filename>" in thiselement.

HTTP servers may alter or ignore the suggestedname.

● content-type● content-transfer-encoding● content-id● any element

See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html for moreinformation about MIME headers and their syntax.

When the content type is specified as "text/*"(for example, "text/xml"), the attachment contentis expected to be in either the textContent inputelement or the file name storing the attachment isexpected to be in the fileName input element.When the content type is anything other than"text/*", the attachment content is expected to bein either the binaryContent input element or thefile name storing the attachment is expected to bein the fileName input element.

binaryContent |textContent |fileName

choice This element contains the mime attachment.

The element can be one of the following:

● binaryContent: content of the attachment content of theattachment when the attachment is binary data.

● textContent: content of the attachment when theattachment is text data.

● fileName: the file name of the attachment written to thedisk.

Context complex Contains information about the client’s environment.

This element holds the optional RemoteAddress element.

RemoteAddress string The IP address of the client that submitted the HTTP request.


The following are the details about the HTTP Receiver activity threading policy.

114


http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html


ProcessStarter

Yes● Minimum QTP

Threads = 10● Maximum QTP

Threads = 75


● Minimum QTP threads● Maximum QTP threads

Send HTTP RequestSend HTTP Request is an asynchronous activity that sends an HTTP request and waits for a responsefrom the web server. This activity sends a request to a server that is compliant with either the HTTP 1.1or 1.0 specification. TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks automatically sends the request using thecorrect version based on the version supported by the HTTP server. Therefore, do not specify the HTTPversion of the server you are sending the request to.

General


Field Description


HTTP Client Specifies the HTTP Client shared resource. For details, refer to HTTP Client.

Parameters The parameters of the HTTP request. For each parameter, you must provide:

● Parameter Name● Parameter Type as string● Parameter Cardinality as Optional, Required, or Repeating

These parameters are specified in the parameters element on the General tab.

Description


Advanced


115


Field

Literal Value/ModuleProperty? Description

Write to File None Select this check box to write the incoming requests thatexceed the specified threshold size to a file instead of storingthe request in memory. You can accept large incomingrequests without consuming a great deal of memory.Selecting this check box displays the Directory andThreshold Data Size fields.

To keep the incoming requests in memory, do notselect this check box.

The files created using this option after writing arenot deleted automatically. You must manage thestorage used by these files. Delete these files whenthey are no longer in use.


Creating Non-ExistingDirectories

No Selecting this check box creates all directories in the pathspecified in the Directory field, if they do not already exist.

Not selecting this check box with one or more non-existingdirectories in the specified path in the Directory field, raisesan exception.

Threshold DataSize(bytes)

Yes The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming request to bekept in memory. Requests larger than the specified size arewritten to a file in the specified directory. The file’s name isthe output so that subsequent activities in the process canaccess the file and read its contents.

Specifying zero (0) in this field causes all incoming requeststo be saved to a file.

Input Editor

Input Editor comprises the data structure of the headers of the HTTP request and HTTP reply message.You can either use the default structure or modify the structure, if the outgoing request or the reply tothe request has a specific data structure for the header.

Input Header Datatype Description

Accept string This field specifies media types that are acceptable forresponse messages for the request. For example, text/*,text/html. Media types are described in the HTTPspecification.

If no Accept-Header field is specified, all media types areacceptable on the server.

116


Input Header Datatype Description

Accept-Charset string This field specifies the character sets that are acceptable forresponse messages for the request. For example,iso-8859-5, unicode-1-1. The character sets are describedin the HTTP specification.

If no Accept-Charset header is specified, any character set isacceptable on the server.

Accept-Encoding string This field specifies the content-coding values that areacceptable for response messages. For example, compressand gzip. See HTTP specification (http://www.w3.org/Protocols/Specs.html) for more information about thisheader field.

Content-Type string This field indicates the media type of the entity body for theoutgoing message and the incoming response. Media typesare described in the HTTP specification. An example of themedia type is text/html; charset=ISO-8850-4.

Cookie string A name and value pair (also known as a cookie) containinginformation that the HTTP server may be expecting. You canset the cardinality for this element to Repeating (*) to specifymore than one cookie. You can also specify multiple name orvalue pairs in a single non-repeating element by separatingeach pair with a comma (for example, "name1=value1,name2=value2").

Pragma string This field is used to include implementation-specificdirectives that might apply to the receiver. See the HTTPspecification (http://www.w3.org/Protocols/Specs.html) formore information about using this field.

Output Editor

Output Editor comprises the data structure of the headers of the HTTP request and HTTP replymessage. You can either use the default structure or modify the structure, if the outgoing request or thereply to the request has a specific data structure for the header.

The header structure is defined by the HTTP protocol. See the HTTP protocol specification for moreinformation about the fields and content of the header of an HTTP request. You can obtain thisspecification at http://www.w3.org/.

Output Header Datatype Description

Allow string This field lists the set of methods supported by the resourceidentified by RequestURI.

Content-Type string This field indicates the media type of the entity body for theoutgoing message and the incoming response. Media typesare described in the HTTP specification. An example of themedia type is text/html; charset=ISO-8850-4.

117


http://www.w3.org/Protocols/Specs.html



http://www.w3.org/

Output Header Datatype Description

Content-Length string This field indicates the size of the entity body (in decimalnumber of OCTETs) of the response message.

Content-Encoding string This field is used as a modifier to the content-type. Whenpresent, its value indicates what additional content encodinghas been applied to the entity-body. Also, what decodingmechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-typereferenced by the Content-Type header field.

Content-Encoding is primarily used to allow a document tobe compressed without losing the identity of its underlyingmedia type. See the HTTP specification for more informationabout this field.

Date string The date and time when the response message was sent.

Location string This field is used to redirect the receiver to a location otherthan RequestURI for completion of the request or foridentification of a new resource.

Set-Cookie string If you want to receive more than one cookie, set thecardinality for this field to Repeating (*).

See the HTTP specification for more information about thisfield.

Pragma string This field is used to include implementation-specificdirectives that might apply to the receiver.

See the HTTP specification for more information about usingthis field.

Input



Host string The HTTP host you want to connect to. Specifying a value forthis input item overrides any value specified on the Generaltab.

Port string The port number that the HTTP server uses for incomingrequests. Specifying a value for this input item overrides anyvalue specified on the General tab.

Method string The HTTP method to use for the request. All HTTP 1.1methods are supported, but the connect method isunnecessary because TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorksautomatically uses the CONNECT method when connectingthrough a proxy server.

If no method is specified in this element, the GET method isused by default.

118



RequestURI string The address portion of the request. This is the portion of theURI before the question mark (?).

PostData string The message body of the HTTP request. Do not specify thiselement when the method of the request is GET.

For details on this input element, refer to Sending Data in theHTTP Request

QueryString string The query string portion of the request. This is the part afterthe question mark (?).


Timeout integer The amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait for a responsefrom the HTTP server.

Headers complex The header fields to send for the request. When this elementis specified on the Input Editor tab, you can use this inputitem to provide values for the header when sending therequest.

119



DynamicHeaders complex The dynamic header is an additional header parameter toadd runtime headers to the outgoing HTTP messages. Thiselement is specified in the Input tab.

You can use only US-ASCII characters inDynamicHeaders.

The DynamicHeaders consists of the following information:


You can consider the following overriding conditions.

● Overrides the value of HeaderName with the value foundin DynamicHeaders if it is a non-repeating header. Ifmore than one occurrence of this header is found underDynamicHeaders, it throws the following exception.

The header [ headerName ] is defined as non-

Repeating Header in Input Headers. This header

cannot have multiple occurences in

DynamicHeaders.

● If it is a repeating element, add the respective name valuepairs under dynamic headers, which is then added to theexisting list maintained for this element.

● For a repeating element, if the new header name is notfound under the "Headers" section declared throughTIBCO Business Studio, the following is added into HTTPHeaders.


— Shows an array of values, if found repeating inDynamicHeaders.

mimeEnvelopeElement



120



mimeHeaders complex This element contains the mime header for each mimePart.mimeHeaders can contain the following information:

● content-disposition: To suggest a filename for anattachment, use "*;filename=<filename>" in thiselement.

The HTTP servers may alter or ignore thesuggested name.

● content-type● content-transfer-encoding● content-id


When the content type is specified as "text/*"(for example, "text/xml"), the attachment contentis in either the textContent input element or thefile name storing the attachment is in the fileNameinput element. When the content type is anythingother than "text/*", the attachment content is ineither the binaryContent input element or the filename storing the attachment is in the fileNameinput element.

binaryContent | choice This element contains the mime attachment.

The element is binaryContent: the content of the attachmentwhen the attachment is binary data.

Output



Header complex The fields of the header specified on the Output Editor tab.See the description of the Output Editor tab for moreinformation about these items.

StatusLine complex This field is the first line of the response message. Thisconsists of the protocol version, a numeric status code, andthe text phrase explaining the status code.

See the HTTP specification for more information about statuscodes in the HTTP responses.

121




httpVersion string The HTTP method to use for the request. All HTTP 1.1methods are supported, but the connect method isunnecessary because TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorksautomatically uses the CONNECT method when connectingthrough a proxy server.

If no method is specified in this element, by default the GETmethod is used.

statusCode string The address portion of the request. This is the portion of theURI before the question mark (?).

reasonPhrase string The message body of the HTTP request. Do not specify thiselement when the method of the request is GET.


binaryContent string The binary content of the response to the request from theHTTP server.

asciiContent integer The ASCII content of the response to the request from theHTTP server.

Headers complex The header fields of the reply. The structure of this outputitem is specified on the Output Headers tab.

122



DynamicHeaders complex The dynamic header is an additional header parameter toadd runtime headers to the outgoing HTTP messages. Thiselement is specified in the Input tab.

You can use only US-ASCII characters inDynamicHeaders.

The dynamic headers consist of the following information:


You can consider the following overriding conditions.

● Overrides the value of HeaderName with the value foundin DynamicHeaders if it is a non-repeating header. Ifmore than one occurrence of this header is found underDynamicHeaders, it throws the following exception.

The header [ headerName ] is defined as non-

Repeating Header in Input Headers. This header

cannot have multiple occurences in

DynamicHeaders.

● If it is a repeating element, add the respective name orvalue pairs under DynamicHeaders, which is added tothe existing list maintained for this element.

● For a repeating element, if the new header name is notfound under the "Headers" section declared throughTIBCO Business Studio, the following is added into HTTPHeaders.



mimeEnvelopeElement



123




● content-disposition: to suggest a filename for anattachment, use "*;filename=<filename>" in thiselement.


● content-type● content-transfer-encoding● content-id


When the content type is specified as "text/*"(for example, "text/xml"), the attachment contentis expected to be in either the textContent inputelement or the file name storing the attachment isexpected to be in the fileName input element.When the content type is anything other than"text/*", the attachment content is in either thebinaryContent input element or the file namestoring the attachment is in the fileName inputelement.


choice This element contains the mime attachment.





Fault


Fault Thrown When..

ActivityTimedOutException The timeout for the activity is attained.

HttpClientException The HTTP server responds with a message containing the 4XXstatus code.

124



Fault Thrown When..

HttpServerException The HTTP server responds with a message containing the 5XXstatus code.

HttpCommunicationException An HTTP exception occurred while executing the specifiedmethod, or when trying to read the response.


The following are the details about Send HTTP Request activity threading policy.



Asynchronous

Yes● Core pool size =

5● Max pool size =

10

You can either configure it by using theThread Pool shared resource or by providingit in the config.ini using the followingproperties:

● bw.sharedresource.http.client.threa

dpool.coresize

● bw.sharedresource.http.client.threa

dpool.maxsize

Sending Data in the HTTP RequestYou can use several HTTP methods in an HTTP request. Each method sends data in the request in adifferent manner. For example, the GET method uses the query string of the RequestURI to passparameter and value pairs. Other methods use the HTTP message body to send data in the request.

The Send HTTP Request activity has the following three input elements for sending data in a request:

● Post Data: corresponds to the body of the HTTP message. All methods except the GET methodaccept data in this element.

● Query String: corresponds to the query string of the RequestURI. You can use this input element todynamically construct the query string using an XPath expression when you do not know thenames or number of the input parameters for the request until the activity executes.

● Parameters: corresponds to the parameters defined in the Parameters field on the General tab. Thisis useful if you have a fixed set of parameters to send with the request. For requests using the GETmethod, these parameters are passed as the query string of the RequestURI. For requests using thePOST method, these parameters are usually sent as the body of the HTTP message. They can also beincluded in the query string.

These input elements are mutually exclusive for some methods. For example, for POST requests, youcan either specify parameters on the General tab and in the parameters input element or you canspecify a PostData input element. However, do not specify both input elements. In the case of a POSTrequest, the PostData input element is ignored when you specify parameters on the General tab.

For GET requests, you can either specify the parameters on the General tab and in the parameters inputelement or you can specify a QueryString input element. If you know the list of parameters for therequest, configure the parameters on the General tab. If the list of parameters is not known until theactivity executes, use the QueryString element. However, when you specify all parameters on theGeneral tab as Optional, you can use the QueryString input element instead of the parameters input

125


element. If any element in the parameters element contains an expression, the QueryString element isignored.

Special Characters in HTTP Requests

Depending upon the content type of the data for the request, the request can contain URL-encoded dataand the server decodes the data. If this is the case and you want to send special characters such as +, /,or = in your HTTP request, your data string must be URL-encoded if you send the data using thePostData or QueryString input elements. If you send the data using the parameters specified on theGeneral tab, encoding is done automatically.

For example, if you want to specify the following PostData:

name=John Smith&address=500 1/2 Main Street,

the PostData input element should result in the following string:

name=John%20Smith&address=500%201%2F2%20Main%20Street

For more information about the URL specification, see http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc1738.txt.

Wait for HTTP RequestWait for HTTP Request is a signal-in activity that waits for an incoming HTTP request in a process.The process instance suspends until the incoming HTTP request is received.

General


Field



HTTPConnection

Yes HTTP Connector shared resource that describes the host nameand the port number on which the process waits for theincoming message.

See HTTP Connector for more information about specifyingshared resources.

Context Path

Path Spec

Yes This is the prefix of a URL path used to select the contexts towhich an incoming request is passed.

You can either specify both Context Path and Path Spec, any,or none of these elements. For example, the path displays inhttp://hostname.com/contextPath/pathSpec format.

If the Context Path is not specified, the context path is referredto as the root context.

Output Style None The output message format. You can select either Text orBinary format for the output messages.

126


http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc1738.txt

Field


Parse PostMethod Data

None Specifies whether the message body of the HTTP requestshould be parsed into a schema for the out of the activity.

When you select this check box, the parameters specified in theParameters field are used to validate the incoming request andparse it into the output schema.

For an incoming GET request, there is no messagebody, so this field has no effect on the incoming GETmessage body requests.

Parameters None The parameters of the incoming HTTP request. You can specifyparameters in this table for the incoming request to be parsedand represented as a schema in this output of the activity. Foreach parameter, you must provide a name, datatype, andwhether the field is Required, Optional, or Repeating.

Use the button to add parameters and button to removeparameters. Use the up and down arrows to move parametersto new positions in the table.

Specifying parameters in this field parses the querystring of the request into the output schema,regardless of whether the Parse Post Method Datacheck box is selected. Selecting the Parse PostMethod Data check box and specifying theparameters in this field is required to parse themessage body along with the query string of therequest.

HTTPAuthentication

None Specifies that the client sending the HTTP request must beauthenticated. The user name and password specified in theincoming request must exist in the LDAP server configured on HTTP Connector.

ExposeSecurityContext

None Select this check box meant for Security Context Propagationand Security Context, to make it available as a transport data inthe mapping panel.

DefaultEncoding

Yes Specifies the encoding to use, if no charset is specified in theContent-Type header of the message. This encoding is used forthe message body and URL.

Description


127


Event

Field Description

Event Timeout(seconds)

This field specifies the amount of time (in seconds) a message waits, if it isreceived before this activity is executed. If the event timeout expires, an erroris logged and the event is discarded. If no value is specified in this field, themessage waits indefinitely. If zero is specified, the event is discarded.


A file change may occur before this activity is executed. This field specifiesthe amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait, if the file change occurs beforethis activity is executed in the process instance. If the event timeout expires,an error is logged and the event is discarded.

Advanced


Field


Write to File None Select this check box to specify that the incoming messages whosebody and attachments exceed the specified threshold size, shouldbe written to a file instead of stored in memory. With this you canaccept large incoming messages without consuming a great dealof memory.

Selecting this check box displays the Directory, Create Non-Existing Directories, and Threshold Size fields. Keep this checkbox clear if you want to keep the incoming messages in memory.

The files created using this option after they arewritten, are not deleted automatically. You mustmanage the storage used by these files and delete themwhen they are no longer in use.



None When you select this check box is, all directories in the pathspecified in the Directory field are created, if they do not alreadyexist.

If you do not select check box and there are one or moredirectories in the specified path in the Directory field that do notexist, an exception is raised.

128


Field


ThresholdDataSize(bytes)

Yes The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming message that can bekept in memory. Messages larger than the specified size arewritten to a file in the specified directory. The name of the file isthe output so that subsequent activities in the process can accessthe file and read its contents.

Specifying zero (0) in this field causes all incoming messages to besaved to a file.

Output Editor

Output Editor tab describes the data structure for the HTTP request headers. You can use the defaultstructure, or you can alter the structure, if the incoming request has a specific data structure for theheader of the request.

Header Datatype Description

Accept string This field specifies media types that are acceptable for responsemessages for the incoming request. For example, text/*,text/html. The media types are described in the HTTP specification.

If no Accept header field is present, the client accepts all mediatypes.

Accept-Charset string This field specifies the character sets that are acceptable forresponse messages for the incoming request. For example,iso-8859-5, and unicode-1-1. Character sets are described inthe HTTP specification.

If no Accept-Charset header is present, the client accepts anycharacter set.

Accept-Encoding

string This field specifies the content-coding values that are acceptablefor response messages. For example, compress, gzip. See theHTTP specification for more information about this header field.

Content-Type string This field indicates the media type of the entity body sent to thereceiver. The media types are described in the HTTPspecification. An example of the media type is text/html;charset=ISO-8850-4.

Content-Length string This field indicates the size of the entity body (in decimalnumber of OCTETs) sent to the receiver. It also accounts forencoding the message body. See Special Characters in HTTPRequests for more information on when the message body isURL encoded.

Connection string Use this field to specify options required for this connection. Forexample, the close option specifies that you want the connectionto be closed when the request is complete.

129



Cookie string See the HTTP specification for more information about this field.

Pragma string This field is used to include implementation-specific directivesthat might apply to the receiver. See the HTTP specification formore information about using this field.

Conversations

You can join the conversation here. Click the Joining existing conversation button to joinmultiple conversations. For details about conversations, refer to Application Development.

Output

The following is output for the activity.


Method string The HTTP method to use for the request. All HTTP 1.1methods are supported.

RequestURI string The address part of the request. This is the part before thequestion mark (?).

HTTP-Versions string The version field of the HTTP request.

PostData orBinaryContent orFileName

string The message body of the HTTP request. The content of thiselement depends upon whether the message body is parsed.The parsing behavior is controlled by the Parse PostMethod Data field on the General tab.

See Special Characters in HTTP Requests for moreinformation.

QueryString string The query string part of the request. This is the part after thequestion mark (?).

Header string The header of the HTTP request.

Protocol string This can be either HTTP or HTTPS, depending upon theprotocol used by the request.

Port string The port number on which the request was received. This isthe port number configured in the HTTP Connector sharedresource.

130



DynamicHeaders complex The dynamic header is an additional header parameter toadd runtime headers to the outgoing HTTP Messages. Thiselement is specified in the Input tab. DynamicHeadersconsists of the following information:


You can consider the following overriding conditions:

● Overrides the value of HeaderName with the valuefound in DynamicHeaders if it is a non-repeatingheader. If more than one occurrence of this header isfound under DynamicHeaders, it throws the followingexception: "The header [ headerName ] is definedas non-Repeating Header in Input Editor. This

header cannot have multiple occurences in

DynamicHeaders."

● If it is a repeating element, add the respective namevalue pairs under DynamicHeaders. This is added to theexisting list maintained for this element.

● For a repeating element, if the new header name is notfound under the "Headers" section declared throughTIBCO Business Studio, the following is added to theHTTP Headers.


— Shows array of values, if found repeating inDynamicHeaders.

mimeEnvelopeElement



131



mimeHeaders complex This element contains the mime header for each mimePart.Mime headers can contain the following information:

● content-disposition: to suggest a filename for anattachment, use "*;filename=<filename>" in thiselement.

HTTP servers may alter or ignore thesuggested name.



When the content type is specified as "text/*"(for example, "text/xml"), the attachmentcontent is in either the textContent input elementor the file name storing the attachment is in thefileName input element. When the content type isanything other than "text/*", the attachmentcontent is in either the binaryContent inputelement or the file name storing the attachment isin the fileName input element.


complex This element contains the mime attachment.





Context complex Contains information about the environment of the client.

This element holds the optional RemoteAddress element.

RemoteAddress string The IP address of the client that submitted the HTTPrequest.

Fault


132



Fault Thrown When..

ActivityTimedOutExcepti

on

The timeout for the activity is attained.


The following are the details about Wait for HTTP Request activity threading policy.


Signal-in Yes● Minimum QTP

Threads = 10● Maximum QTP

Threads = 75


● Minimum QTP threads● Maximum QTP threads

Send HTTP ResponseSend HTTP Response is a synchronous activity that sends a response to a previously received HTTPrequest. This activity is used in conjunction with the HTTP Receiver process starter activity and theWait for HTTP Request activity. The default status line returned by this activity is "200 OK".

General


Field Description


Reply For The Wait for HTTP Request activity or HTTP Receiver process starter activitythat received the request. This is a list of available activities that can receiveHTTP requests.

Flush Response You can specify whether the response is to be flushed after each Send HTTPResponse activity.

By default, this property is not selected. This check box is useful when there area large number of Send HTTP Response activities in a job. In such cases, theClose Connection check box is selected in the last activity to indicate theresponse is complete.

However, selecting the Flush Response check box overrides this behavior andcauses the response to be flushed after each Send HTTP Response activity.

133


Field Description

CloseConnection

Specifies that this activity contains the last part of an HTTP response. This fieldis used when you have more than one Send HTTP Response activities in aprocess and each activity sends a part of the response to the client. All SendHTTP Response activities in a process should have this check box clear, exceptthe last Send HTTP Response activity. Select this check box for the last SendHTTP Response activity to indicate the response is complete.

Select this check box, if the entire response is sent by only one Send HTTPResponse activity in the process.

Description


Input Editor

Input Editor tab describes the data structure for the headers of the HTTP response. You can use thedefault structure, or you can alter the structure, if the outgoing response has a specific data structure forthe header of the request.

The header structure is defined by the HTTP protocol. See the HTTP Protocol specification for moreinformation about the fields and content of the header of a HTTP request. You can obtain thisspecification at www.w3.org.

The following are the default header fields.


StatusLine string This field is the first line of a response message. This consistsof the protocol version, a numeric status code, and the textphrase explaining the status code.

See the HTTP specification for more information about statuscodes in HTTP responses.

Content-Type string This field indicates the media type of the entity body sent tothe receiver. The media types are described in the HTTPspecification. An example of the media type is: text/html;charset=ISO-8850-4.

By default this item is set to text or html. If you are usingthis activity and the Retrieve Resources activity to retrieve aWSDL file, you should set the type to text or xml whenspecifying values on the Input tab.

Set-Cookie string See the HTTP specification for more information about thisfield.

Pragma string This field is used to include implementation-specificdirectives that might apply to the receiver. See the HTTPspecification for more information about using this field.

Location string This field is used to redirect the receiver to a location otherthan the RequestURI for the completion of the request or foridentifying a new resource.

134


http://www.w3.org/

Conversations

You can initiate the conversation here. Click the Add New Conversation button to initiate multipleconversations. For details about conversations, refer to Application Development.

Input



binaryContent binary The binary content of the response to the request.

asciiContent string The ASCII content of the response to the request.

Headers complex The fields of the header specified on the Input Editor tab. Seethe description of the Input Editor tab for more informationabout these items.

Only the first Send HTTP Response activity in theprocess can set the Headers element. If your processcontains multiple Send HTTP Response activities, theheaders are set by the first activity and this element isignored for all subsequent activities.

DynamicHeaders

complex The dynamic header is an additional header parameter to addruntime headers to the outgoing HTTP messages. This elementis specified on the Input tab. DynamicHeaders consists of thefollowing information:


You can consider the following overriding conditions:

● Overrides the value of the HeaderName with the valuefound in the DynamicHeaders, if it is a non-repeatingheader. If more than one occurrence of this header is foundunder DynamicHeaders, it throws the following exception:The header [ headerName ] is defined as non-

Repeating Header in Input Editor. This header

cannot have multiple occurences in DynamicHeaders.

● If it is a repeating element, add the respective name valuepairs under DynamicHeaders. This is added to the existinglist maintained for this element.

● For a repeating element, if the new header name is not foundunder the "Headers" section in TIBCO Business Studio, thefollowing is added into the HTTP headers.

— Shows only one value, if found once in theDynamicHeaders.


135



mimeEnvelopeElement


This element contains a repeating element named mimePart thatcontains each mime attachment.


● content-disposition: to suggest a filename for an attachment,use "*;filename=<filename>" in this element.



See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html for more informationabout MIME headers and their syntax.

When the content type is specified as "text/*" (forexample, "text/xml"), the attachment content iseither the textContent input element or the file namestoring the attachment is in the fileName inputelement. When the content type is anything other than"text/*", the attachment content is in either thebinaryContent input element or the file name storingthe attachment is in the fileName input element.

binaryContent|

choice This element is the content of the attachment when theattachment is binary data.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

HttpCommunicationExceptio

n

An HTTP exception occurred when sending the response.

136



JAVA Palette

Configuring JAVA in BusinessWorks Application ModuleTo access JAVA code in TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks , you need to configure the ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks module with JAVA nature.

New Project

To configure a new project with JAVA nature:

Procedure

1. On the menu bar, click icon.This opens the New BusinessWorks Application Module wizard.

2. Specify Project name and select the Use Java configuration check box and click Finish.

In Project Explorer you see a JRE System Library 1.7.0 folder created in your project.

137


Existing Project

To configure an existing project with JAVA nature:

1. In Project Explorer, right-click on the project and select Configure > Convert to JavaProject.

2. Import and execute the existing JAVA source (which resides in the JAR file) inside the sameapplication module.

3. In the ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks 6 application module (which has java nature), select thelib folder.

4. Right-click and select Import > General > File System.

5. Click the Browse button of the From directory field and provide the location of jar file.

6. Now click the Browse button of the Info folder field and select the jar file you want toimport to the lib folder, and click Finish.

138


This copies and places the jar file in the application module's lib directory and adds it to theclasspath.

Converting JAVA Class to XML SchemaThis topic lists the rules that need to be followed when converting Java class to XML schema.

The Java class is converted to an XML schema using the following rules:

● The Java class public member should not have the public getter and setter methods for it.● The Java class member public variable name is mapped to an XML element with the same name. For

example, a Java class member variable declared as public int ZipCode is mapped to an XMLelement named ZipCode.

● The Java Bean accessors and modifiers are mapped to appropriate XML element names. Forexample, a Java class method public int getBalance() or public void setBalance(int Balance) aremapped to an XML element named Balance.

● Only one XML element is created regardless of how many members of the Java class share the samename. For example, there may be an attribute named MySalary and accessors named getMySalary()and setMySalary(). This translates to one element named MySalary in the resulting XML document.

● All Java primitive types are supported. Datatypes that extend java.util.Collections, are alsosupported (for example, List, ArrayList, and Vectors). Arrays (for example, int[ ] and string[ ]) arealso supported.

● Use Java generics and provide the type information while declaring and creating the collection forexample,

Instead of using List list = new ArrayList();

use generics: List<String> list = new ArrayList<String>();● The datatype java.util.Map or any types that extend java.util.Map are not supported. For

example, HashMap is not supported.

Creating Custom XPath FunctionsThis topic provides the detailed procedure of creating a custom XPath function group. You can use theCustom XPath Function wizard to create your custom XPath function group. It uses thecom.tibco.xml.cxf.customXPathFunction extension.

Procedure

1. Launch TIBCO Business Studio and select File > New > Project.

2. In the New Project window, select Plug-in Project and click Next.

139


3. Specify a name for the project that reflects the XPath functions, for example,MyCustomXPathFunctions. Retain all other default selections and click Next.

4. On the Plug-in Content page, locate the Options group and clear the check boxes of the followingoptions:a) Generate an activator, a Java class that controls the plug-in's life cycleb) This plug-in will make contributions to the UI

140


5. Accept all other defaults and click Next.

6. Select Custom XPath Function Wizard on the Templates page, and click Next.

141


7. In the New Custom XPath Function Group plug-in project window provide values for the followingfields and click Next to continue.

● Category: The name of the category that includes the custom XPath functions

● Prefix: The prefix for the functions

142


● Namespace: The namespace for the functions

● Help Text: The description of the functions

8. Specify the XPath Function and XPath Function Parameters in the XPath Function Group CreationSection dialog.

9. Click the Add button located on the right side of the XPath Functions table and provide values for:

● Name: the name of the function● Return Type: the return type of the function● Description: the description of the function

10. Click the Add button located on the right side of the XPath Function Parameters table. Specifyvalues for the following parameters and click Finish:

● Name: the name of the parameter● Type: the data type of the parameter● Optional: select the check box if the parameter is optional.

11. The Open Associated Perspective dialog displays. Click Yes.TIBCO Business Studio opens in Plug-in and the Plug-in Development perspective.

12. Open the Java class in the newly created Custom XPath function plug-in and implement theCustom XPath function.

143


Now your Custom XPath function is ready for use at design time and run time.

Using Custom XPath Function at Design Time and RuntimeYou can use the newly created Custom XPath functions at design time and run time.

Making Your Custom XPath Function Available at Design Time

Procedure

1. Right-click the Custom XPath Function Plug-in project and select Export from the menu. On theExport window, select Plug-in Development > Deployable plug-ins and fragments and click Next.

2. Select the Install into host Repository radio button on the Deployable plug-ins and fragmentsscreen and click Finish.

144


The Custom XPath function plug-in is exported into the TIBCO Business Studio instance to use atdesign time.

3. You may be prompted with the following security warning message. Click OK.

4. Click Restart Now when the following window is displayed.

5. In TIBCO Business Studio, the Custom XPath function is available for use in any activity mapper inan Activematrix BusinessWorks process.

145


Making Custom XPath Function Available at Run Time

● After using the Custom XPath function in an activity in an ActiveMatrix BusinessWorksprocess at design time, include the Custom XPath function plug-in the application project.

● After including the Custom XPath Function Plug-in in the application project, test it in the

Debugger and then, export it as an EAR, and deploy at run time.

Deleting Custom XPath FunctionsThis topic lists the steps to uninstall a Custom XPath function so that it is not visible in the mapper.

Procedure

1. On the menu bar, click Help > About TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks. On Mac, this is locatedunder the "BusinessWorks" menu.

146


2. Click Installation Details.The following dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the Custom XPath function you want to uninstall, and click the Uninstall button.

4. Restart the workspace.

Java InvokeJava Invoke is a synchronous activity that can be used to invoke a Java class method. You can constructan instance of the specified Java class, if you invoke the constructor for the class.

General


147


Field

Literal Value/ModuleProperty Description


Java GlobalInstance

None Specify the resource in this field to execute methods on sharedJava objects created by Java Global Instance resources.

Refer to Java Global Instance for more information about theshared Java objects created by Java Global Instance resources.

This disables the options on the Advanced tab. In the drop-down list in the Method field, you can select the method toexecute.

If the configuration of the Java Global Instanceresource changes, select and view any Java Invokeactivities in your process that reference the JavaGlobal Instance to automatically propagate thechanges. An exception is raised if you attempt to testyour process before refreshing the reference to theJava Global Instance. You may need to manuallyupdate the mappings of any input or output, if youselect a new method with a different signature in theJava Global Instance resource.

MultiOutput None Select this check box to specify multiple parameters in the Javainvoke method.

Class Name None The declared Java class whose method you want to execute.Use the Browse A Class button to select the class, or use theJava Global Instance field to specify a shared Java object.

Method None The method in the selected Java class you want to execute.

You can use the drop-down list to select a different method inthe selected Java class, if required.

148


Field


Parameters None The parameters for the Java Invoke activity. This element isavailable when the MultiOutput check box is selected.

This element contains a list of input and output parameters thatare required for the Java invoke. This element is not availablewhen the selected method has no parameters.

Each Input and Output parameter has the following fields.

● Field Type: It can be either In or Out.

● Field Name: The name of the parameter. When creating anew parameter, provide the name of the parameter. Thesetter/getter methods get automatically generated for thesame, or select the options from the drop-down list of thenames of class member variables that have setter/gettermethods.

● Type: The datatype of the parameter. The default is string.Specify one of the supplied Java primitive types, or specifyObject Reference when accepting a Java object from anotherJava activity as input.

● Occurrence: Specify whether the parameter is Required,Optional, or Repeating.

● Click to add the input parameter.

● Click to add the output parameter.

● Click to delete the parameter.

Description


Advanced


149


Field


Instantiate thereferenced class

None This field controls one of the following:

● The referenced class must be constructed when the activityis executed,

● An object reference must be supplied in the activity’s inputschema.

Select this check box, if you want to construct the referencedclass using the default constructor when the activity executes.In this case, the referenced class is not included in theactivity’s input schema.

Do not select this check box, if you want to provide an objectreference for the class name specified on the General tab. Theobject must be created and contained in the output schema ofa previously executed activity.

In this case, the referenced class is included in the activity’sinput schema.

This check box is not available when MultiOutput on theGeneral tab is selected.

Cache the object None This option is available only when the Instantiate thereferenced class check box is selected.

Select this check box to specify that all instances of this JavaInvoke activity share the instance of the instantiatedreferenced class. A cached referenced object is kept in thememory until the process engine terminates.

Not selecting this check box leads to each instance of this JavaInvoke activity creating its own copy of the referenced class.

Invoke CleanupMethod

None This check box is available only when the Cache the objectcheck box is selected.

When selected, you can invoke a method on the cached objectbefore the object is released from memory, when the processengine terminates. You can perform cleanup activities, such asclosing connections, updating database tables, and so on.

Select this check box to display the Cleanup Method field.

Cleanup Method None This field is available only when the Invoke Cleanup Methodcheck box is selected.

Using this field you can specify the name of the method toinvoke, before the cached class in memory is released.

The selected method cannot contain any parameters, thereforeonly methods with no parameters are listed in this field. Anyvalues returned by the selected method are ignored, butexceptions raised by the selected method are sent to the log.

150


Input



Parameters varies This element contains a list of input parameters that arerequired for the Java invoke Method selected on the Generaltab.

This element is not available when the selected method has noparameters.

Output



MethodReturnValue varies The Output tab has the return value specified for the Javainvoke Method selected on the General tab.

This element is not available for methods that return void.

Parameters varies The Output tab lists all output parameters specified on theGeneral tab.

Selecting MultiOutput on the General tab makes this outputitem available.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the exceptions thrown by this activity. Selecting a method to invoke lists theexceptions thrown by the method.

In theJava Invoke activity:

● If MultiOutput is selected, the Fault tab throws the InvocationException exception with errorschema element as msg,msgCode,methodName,exceptionClassName,exceptionMessage.

● If MultiOutput is not selected, the Fault tab shows the exceptions thrown by the method selected init with error schema elements as: 1:Java exception Object 2:exceptionClassName3:exceptionMessage

● If MultiOutput is not selected and method does not throw any exception, again the Fault tab showsInvocationException with error schema element as msg, msgCode, methodName,exceptionClassName, and exceptionMessage.

Error Schema Element Datatype Description

msg string The TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks error message.For details, refer to Error Codes.

msgCode string The TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks error code. Fordetails, refer to Error Codes.

151


Error Schema Element Datatype Description

methodName string The name of the Java method that raised the exception.

exceptionClassName string The exception class name.

The value of this element is obtained by calling the<exception>.getClass().getName() method.

exceptionMessage string The exception message.

The value of this element is obtained by calling the<exception>.getMessage() method.

Java Process StarterJava Process Starter is a process starter activity. You can use this activity to create a custom starterwritten in Java.

Java Process Starter Abstract Class

The JavaProcessStarter abstract class defines the interface of your Java Process Starter with the TIBCOActiveMatrix BusinessWorks application. You must define an implementation for the followingmethods:

● init() : this method is called when the process engine starts up. This method should initialize anyresource connections. You could also specify a Java global instance on the Advanced tab thatinitializes resource connections. Java global instances are also loaded and initialized duringapplication start up. You can call this .getJavaGlobalInstance() to obtain the Java global instanceresource in your process starter code.

● onStart() : this method is called by the process engine to activate the process starter. This methodshould activate any event notifier or resource observer code. The notifier or observer code can thencall the onEvent() method to start a process instance.

● onStop(): this method is called by the application to deactivate the process starter. This methodshould deactivate any event notifier or resource observer code.

● onShutdown(): this method is called by the application when the AppNode shuts down. Thismethod should release any resources and resource connections and perform any required clean upoperations.

The following methods are already implemented and can be used in your code:

● onEvent(Object object): this method is called when a listener or resource observer catches a newevent. The input to this method is a Java object containing the event data.

● getGlobalInstance(): this method returns an object reference to the Java global resource specified onthe Advanced tab of the process starter. This is useful if you want to place initialization code orother shared information in a Java global resource instead of in the init() method of this class.

● onError(): this method throws the exception specified in the input parameter. Use this method topropagate an error to the TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks process instance when a listener orresource observer fails to generate an event.

Passing Java Objects Between Java Activities

You can create instances of Java objects in Java Invoke activity or by using the Java Invoke or XML ToJava activities. These Java objects can be passed using an output parameter to another activity later inthe process definition. The Java Invoke activity receiving a Java object accepts the object into an inputparameter. Map the output Java object to the input object of the receiving Java Invoke object.

152


Any Java objects passed by input and output parameters between activities should have the capabilityto serialize.

General


FieldProcessProperty Description

Name No The name to be displayed as the label for the activity in theprocess.

Class Name No The name of the compiled Java class that is implemented byextending the JavaProcessStarter abstract class.

Use the Browse a Class button to select the class from thespecified class library. This shows the classes that extend fromthe JavaProcessStarter abstract class.

Initialize withParameters

No Selecting this check box displays the Init Method field and InitParameters table.

Init Method No Selecting the Initialize with Parameters check box displays thisfield.

You can use the drop-down list, if required, to select a differentmethod in the selected Java class.

Init Parameters No Specify default values in this table for the input parameters ofthe init() method. Each input parameter has three fields:

● Parameter Name: the name of the parameter.● Parameter Type: the datatype of the parameter.● Parameter Value: specify a default value for the parameter.

Description


Advanced


Field Description

Sequence key This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies which processesshould run in sequence. Process instances with sequencing keys thatevaluate to the same value are executed in the sequence the processinstance was created.

Custom Job Id This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies a custom job IDfor the process instance.

153


Field Description

Java Global Instance A Java global instance resource. Specify a value in this field to reference aJava global instance resource in your JavaProcessStarter implementationclass. Refer to Java Global Instance for details.

You can use the getGlobalInstance() method to obtain a reference to theJava global instance resource.

Conversations


For more information about conversations, refer to Application Development.

Output



javaObject varies The Java object that was passed to the onEvent() method.

By default, this element is a Java object reference.

Fault


Error SchemaElement Datatype Description

msg string The ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks error message. For details,refer to Error Codes.

msgCode string The ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks error code. For details, referto Error Codes.

Java To XMLJava To XML is a synchronous activity. You can use this activity to convert Java object's data membersinto an XML document.

If the class does not have a public data member and only has a Java bean modifier that sets the data, theinput schema contains an element for the modifier, but the resulting XML document has no value setfor the corresponding element. For example, the Java object has a method declared as public int setID(),but there is no method for getting the ID and the data member ID is not public. In this case, an elementnamed ID in this activity’s output schema exists, but that element has no value because there is nopublic mechanism for getting the data.

General


154


FieldModuleProperty? Description

Name No The name to be displayed as the label for the resource.

Class Name No The class name in the Java schema to use.

Use the Browse button to bring up the dialog to select the Javaclass.

Click the Reload button to regenerate the schema.

Description


Advanced


Field Description

Instantiate thereferenced class

This field controls one of the following:

● The referenced class must be constructed when the activity isexecuted.

● An object reference must be supplied in the activity’s input schema.

Select this check box to construct the referenced class using the defaultconstructor when the activity executes. In this case, the referenced classis not included in the activity’s input schema.

Do not select this check box if you want to provide an object referencefor the class name specified on the General tab. The object must becreated and contained in the output schema of a previously executedactivity.

In this case, the referenced class is included in the activity’s inputschema.

Cache the object This option is available only when you select the Instantiate thereferenced class check box.

Select this check box to specify that all instances of this Java Invokeactivity share the instance of the instantiated referenced class. A cachedreferenced object is kept in the memory until the process engineterminates.

Not selecting this check box leads to each instance of this Java To XMLactivity creating its own copy of the referenced class.

Input


155


Input item Datatype Description

referenced class Java Object An object reference to the Class Name specified on theGeneral tab. This element is only available when you do notselect the Instantiate the referenced class check box on theAdvanced tab.

Output



XML Schema varies The output is the XML schema from the converted Java object.

The elements in the schema display in alphabetical order.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for more informationabout error codes and possible the corrective actions to take.


JavaToXMLConversionExceptio

n

An error occurred when converting the Java object to XML.

XML To JavaXML to Java is a synchronous activity. You can use this activity to create an instance of a Java objectbased on data from an XML document. The XML schema for providing the input to the Java object orJava schema specified on the General tab of this activity.

The specified Java class must meet the following requirements:

● The Java class must have a public default constructor (that is, a constructor with no arguments).● The Java class must be eligible to be serialized (that is, the class must implement or be a subclass of a

class that implements java.io.Serializable).

If the class does not have a public data member and only has a Java bean accessor that retrieves thedata, the input schema contains an element for the accessor. However, the resulting Java object has novalue set for the member. For example, the object has a method declared as public int getID(), but thereis no method for setting the ID and the data member ID is not public. In this case, an element named IDin this activity’s input schema, but mapping a value to the element does not result in setting the IDmember of the output Java object. This is because there is no public mechanism for setting the data.

General



Name No The name to be displayed as the label for the resource.

156



Class Name No The class name in the Java schema to use.

Use the Browse button to bring up the dialog to select the Javaclass.

Description


Input



XML Schema varies The XML schema you want to convert to a Java object. Thecontent of this schema depends upon the Java class or Javaschema defined in the Class Name field on the General tab.

The elements in the schema display in an alphabetical order.

Output



referencedclass

Java Object A Java object that is created out of the XML schema.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for more informationabout error codes and the possible corrective actions.

Fault Thrown When..

XMLToJavaConversionExceptio

n

An error occurred when converting the XML schema to a Javaobject.

157


JDBC Palette

The JDBC palette contains activities and shared resources for querying, updating, or calling storedprocedures in the database.

JDBC Call ProcedureJDBC Call Procedure is an asynchronous activity that calls a database procedure or function using thespecified JDBC connection. If this activity is not part of a transaction group, the SQL statement iscommitted after the activity completes.

If this activity is part of a transaction group, the SQL statement is committed or rolled back with theother JDBC activities in the group at the end of the transaction.

To override the default behavior of transaction groups for certain JDBC activities in a transactiongroup, select the Override Transaction Behavior check box on the Advanced tab. This specifies that theactivity is outside of the transaction and the SQL statement is committed when the activity completes,even if the activity is in a transaction group.

General


Field



JDBC SharedResource

Yes The path to the shared resource containing the JDBCconnection information.

See JDBC Connection for more information about JDBCresources.

Timeout Yes The time (in seconds) to wait for the procedure call tocomplete. If the call does not complete in the specified timelimit, it returns an error.

Maximum Rows Yes The maximum number of rows to retrieve. To retrieve allrows, specify 0.

Description


Procedure

The Procedure tab has the following fields.

158


Field Description

Schema The schema in which the procedure resides. This name is used to resolvenaming conflicts, if more than one schema in the database has the selectedprocedure with the same name.

Click the Browse button to select a schema from the database using thespecified JDBC Connection.

Catalog or Package The catalog or package in which the procedure resides. This name is used toresolve naming conflicts if more than one catalog or package in the databasehas selected procedures with the same name.

Click the Browse button to select a catalog or package from the database usingthe specified JDBC Connection. If a schema is specified in the Schema field,only catalogs or packages in the specified schema are listed.

This field is only applicable to databases with more than one catalog andpackage. See your database documentation for more information aboutcatalogs and packages.

Procedure /Function

The name of the database procedure or user-defined function to call.

Click the Browse button to select the database for available procedures orfunctions after specifying the JDBC Connection field.

Click the Refresh button to retrieve the changes from the database, if youchange the parameters or signatures while editing your project.

The list of available procedures and functions is limited by the valuessupplied in the Schema and Catalog or Package fields.

Parameters This field displays the parameters for the procedure and you can override thedata type (IN, OUT, IN/OUT) for each parameter in the Direction column.

The parameters listed in the table show the Parameter Name, Data Type, andthe Direction (IN, OUT, IN/OUT) of the each parameter. All IN and IN/OUTparameters listed in the Parameters table are shown in the Input tab of theactivity for the user to provide values.

Advanced


Field Description

OverrideTransactionBehavior

Overrides the default behavior of a transaction group. If this activity is in atransaction group, the activity is normally committed or rolled back with theother transactional activities.

Select this check box to specify that this activity is not part of the transactiongroup and is committed when it completes. Also, select this check box to usea separate database connection to perform the activity and commit the SQLstatement.

159


Field Description

Interpret EmptyString as Null

Specifies how empty strings in the activity’s input elements should behandled. Selecting this check box sends the nulls to the database whereempty strings are supplied.

Empty strings are treated as zero-length strings, if this check box is notselected. Whether you use this option or not, you can still use XPath to setinput elements explicitly to null.

ResultSets UseSchema

Specifies that the design-time must try to fetch the schema when a resultsetis expected from a stored procedure call.

When selected, TIBCO Business Studio tries to invoke the stored procedurewith default values and get the metadata for the resultset.

If the check box is not selected, or if TIBCO Business Studio does not get anymetadata, the results are displayed as ’unknown resultsets’.

Input

The input for this activity is dependent upon the input parameters of the database procedure.


inputSet complex The input parameters of the database procedure. Thedatatype contained in this element varies depending uponthe parameters specified for the database procedure.

The IN and IN/OUT parameters displayed in the Parameterstable on the Procedure tab are displayed here for the user toset values.

ServerTimeZone string Specifies the time zone for the database server.

timeout number The time (in seconds) to wait for the procedure call tocomplete. The call if not completed in the specified timelimit, returns an error.

maxRows number The maximum number of rows to retrieve. To retrieve allrows, specify 0.

Output

The output of the activity is depends upon the output parameters of the database procedure.


outputSet complex The output of the database procedure. The datatypecontained in this element varies depending upon what thedatabase procedure returns.

160



UnresolvedResultSets

string The output of the database procedure may return other resultsets. These result sets are returned in this output item as anXML string. Create a schema resource to describe these resultsets, and then use the Parse XML activity to parse the XMLbased on the schema. You can then use the parsed output insubsequent activities.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for more informationabout error codes and the possible corrective action to take.

Fault Thrown When..

JDBCConnectionNotFoundException An error occurred when attempting to connectto the specified database.

InvalidTimeZoneException An invalid time zone was specified.

JDBCSQLException An SQL error occurred.

LoginTimedOutException A timeout occurred while attempting toconnect to the database.

ActivityTimedOutException The operation times out.

JDBC QueryJDBC Query is an asynchronous activity that performs the specified SQL SELECT statement. If thisactivity is not part of a transaction group, the SQL statement is committed after the activity completes.

If this activity is part of a transaction group, the SQL statement is committed or rolled back with theother JDBC activities in the group at the end of the transaction.

If you want to override the default behavior of transaction groups for certain JDBC activities in atransaction group, you can select the Override Transaction Behavior check box on the Advanced tab.This specifies that the activity is outside of the transaction and the SQL statement is committed whenthe activity completes, even if the activity is in a transaction group.

General


Field



JDBC SharedResource

Yes The path to the shared configuration resource containing theJDBC connection information. For details, refer to JDBCConnection

161


Field


Timeout Yes The time (in seconds) to wait for the query to complete. If thequery does not complete in the given time limit, an error isreturned.

Maximum Rows Yes The maximum number of rows to retrieve. To retrieve allrows, specify 0.

Description


Statement

The Statement tab has the following fields.

Field Description

Statement This is the SQL SELECT statement to perform in the database. You can use aSQL Builder wizard to build the query for the desired database.

Prepared Statement The Prepared Statement contains the Parameter Name and Data Type fields.All the parameters defined in the Prepared Statement table are shown in theInput tab of the activity for the user to provide values.

Each prepared statement corresponds to the question mark in the sameposition in the SQL statement. That is, the first prepared statement in the listcorresponds to the first question mark, the second prepared statement in thelist corresponds to the second question mark, and so on. The warning is forthe purpose of information only. Ensure that the parameters in this fieldcorrectly correspond to the statement.

You can optionally specify names for each prepared parameter. By default, the prepared statements arenamed Parameter1, Parameter2, and so on. You must supply the datatype of each parameter to the SQLstatement, and this datatype is used in the input schema for the statement.

Run Query Button

Runs the JDBC Select statement entered in the Statement field and shows the results in the ResultsView. These results are persisted in the workspace.

SQL Button

Launch Eclipse SQL Builder. For more information on using the SQL Builder to visually build queries,go to: http://help.eclipse.org/indigo/index.jsp?topic=%2Forg.eclipse.datatools.sqltools.doc.user%2Fdoc%2Fhtml%2Fasc1229700427574.html

Advanced


162


http://help.eclipse.org/indigo/index.jsp?topic=%2Forg.eclipse.datatools.sqltools.doc.user%2Fdoc%2Fhtml%2Fasc1229700427574.html

http://help.eclipse.org/indigo/index.jsp?topic=%2Forg.eclipse.datatools.sqltools.doc.user%2Fdoc%2Fhtml%2Fasc1229700427574.html

Field Description



This activity is not part of the transaction group and is committed when itcompletes, when this check box is selected. Selecting this option uses aseparate database connection to perform the activity and commit the SQLstatement.

Use Nil Specifies whether NULLs are represented as optional schema elements orwhether each item that can contain a NULL has subitems.


Specifies how empty strings in the activity’s input elements should behandled. Selecting this check box sends the nulls to the database whereempty strings are supplied. Empty strings are treated as zero-length strings,when this check box is not selected. Whether you use this field or not, youcan still use XPath to set input elements explicitly to null.

Many databases treat empty strings and nulls as the same, so thisfield does not affect how the database interprets empty strings.

Process In Subsets Selecting this check box specifies that you want to process the result set insmaller batches rather than processing the entire result set at once. When thischeck box is selected, the subsetSize input element is displayed for you tospecify the size of each batch of records you want to process. Also, thelastSubset output element is displayed and is set to true when the last batchof records is being processed.

Not selecting this check box returns the whole result set.

Input




timeout number The time (in seconds) to wait for the query to complete. If thequery does not complete in the given time limit, an error isreturned.

maxRows number The maximum number of rows to retrieve. To retrieve all rows,specify 0.

Output



resultSet complex The root class for the output of the JDBC Query activity. Thisclass contains all output items for the activity.

163



Record complex The result of the database query. The contents of the Recordelement depends upon the columns returned by the query.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

JDBCConnectionNotFoundException An error occurred when attempting to connect to thespecified database.



LoginTimedOutException A timeout has occurred while attempting to connect tothe database.

InvalidSQLTypeException A parameter’s datatype does not match the datatype ofthe table column.

DuplicatedFieldNameException A duplicate field name was specified.

ActivityTimedOutException The operation has timed out.

JDBC UpdateJDBC Update is an asynchronous activity that performs the specified SQL INSERT, UPDATE, orDELETE statement.

If this activity is not part of a transaction group, the SQL statement is committed after the activitycompletes. If this activity is part of a transaction group, the SQL statement is committed or rolled backwith the other JDBC activities in the group at the end of the transaction.

If you want to override the default behavior of transaction groups for certain JDBC activities in atransaction group, you can select the Override Transaction Behavior check box on the Advanced tab.This specifies that the activity is outside of the transaction and the SQL statement is committed whenthe activity completes, even if the activity is in a transaction group.

General


Field



164


Field


JDBC SharedResource

Yes The path to the shared resource containing the JDBC connectioninformation. For details, refer to JDBC Connection


Description


Statement

The Statement tab has the following fields.

Field Description

Statement This is an SQL INSERT UPDATE OR DELETE statement to perform in thedatabase. You can use the SQL Builder wizard to build the query for thedesired database.

Prepared Statement The Prepared Statement contains the Parameter Name and Datatype fields.All the parameters defined in the Prepared Statement table are shown in theInput tab of the activity for the user to provide values.

Each prepared statement corresponds to the question mark in the sameposition in the SQL statement. That is, the first prepared statement in the listcorresponds to the first question mark, the second prepared statement in thelist corresponds to the second question mark, and so on. The warning is forinformational purposes only, you must make sure the parameters in this fieldcorrectly correspond to the statement.

Advanced


Field Description

Insert if recorddoesn't exist

Select this check box to insert the record if it does not exist in the database.



If you select this check box, this activity is not part of the transaction groupand is committed when it completes. Selecting this option uses a separatedatabase connection to perform the activity and commit the SQL statement.

165


Field Description


Specifies how empty strings in the activity’s input elements should behandled.

Selecting this check box sends the nulls to the database where empty stringsare supplied.

When the check box is not selected, empty strings are treated as zero-lengthstrings. Whether you use this check box option or not, you can still use XPathto set input elements explicitly to null.

Many databases treat empty strings and nulls as the same, so thischeck box does not affect how the database interprets emptystrings.

Batch Update Selecting this check box signifies that you want to perform multiplestatements by supplying an array of records as input to the activity whereeach record matches the prepared parameters for the statement. Thestatements are performed in one batch at the end of the activity’s execution.

If you do not select this check box, the expected input is the list of preparedparameters for the statement (no array of records). Some database driversmay not support batch updates. A JDBCSQLException is thrown, if thedatabase driver does not support batch updates.

Input




timeout number The time (in seconds) to wait for the query to complete. If thequery does not complete in the given time limit, an error isreturned.

Output



noOfUpdates integer The number of updates performed by the statement specifiedon the General tab.

This element can also return -2 that indicates, in the event of abatch update, that the updates were successful, but it isunknown how many updates were performed.

Fault


166


Fault Thrown When..




LoginTimedOutException A timeout has occurred while attempting to connect to thedatabase.

InvalidSQLTypeException A parameter’s datatype does not match the datatype of thetable column.


SQL DirectSQL Direct is an asynchronous activity that executes an SQL statement that you supply. With thisactivity you can build an SQL statement dynamically using other activities, then pass the SQLstatement into this activity's input. You can use this activity to execute DDL SQL statements likeCREATE and DROP. You can also execute SQL statements that are not supported by other activities inthe JDBC palette.

If this activity is not part of a transaction group, the SQL statement is committed after the activitycompletes. If this activity is part of a transaction group, the SQL statement is committed or rolled backwith the other JDBC activities in the group at the end of the transaction.

General


Field



JDBC SharedResource

Yes The path to the shared resource containing the JDBC connectioninformation. For details, refer to JDBC Connection.


Maximum Rows Yes The maximum number of rows to retrieve. To retrieve all rows,specify 0.

Description


167


Advanced


Field Description



If you select this check box, this activity is not part of the transaction groupand is committed when it completes. Selecting this option uses a separatedatabase connection to perform the activity and commit the SQL statement.

Input



statement string The SQL statement you want to execute. You can use anyprocess variables to build the statement dynamically, ifrequired.


timeout number The time (in seconds) to wait for the query to complete. If thequery does not complete in the specified time limit, an error isreturned.

maxRows number The maximum number of rows to retrieve. To retrieve all rows,specify 0.

Output



noOfUpdates string The number of updates performed by the statement specifiedon the General tab.

This element can also return -2 that indicates, in the event of abatch update, that the updates were successful, but it isunknown how many updates were performed.

168



unknownResultSet

string The result of the database statement. The result elementdepends upon what is returned by the statement.

The result set is a list of zero or more rows with zero or morecolumns. Each column contains a name and a value element.You can use XPath expressions to retrieve the desired row andcolumn from the result set. There can be multiple result setsreturned by the statements executed by this activity.

Because of this, this output item is a repeatable list of result sets.The first item in the list of result sets corresponds to the resultset returned by the first statement executed by this activity. Thesecond item in the list of result sets corresponds to the result setreturned by the second statement executed by this activity, andso on.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..




LoginTimedOutException A timeout has occurred while attempting to connect to thedatabase.


169


JMS Palette

Java Message Service (JMS) is a specification about sending and receiving messages between two ormore applications in a Java environment. The JMS palette is used to send and receive JMS messages ina process.

The models supported are:

● Point-to-Point (queues): Message delivered to one recipient● Publish/Subscribe (topics): Message delivered to multiple recipients

JMS supports these two models by using distinct interfaces within the API for each messaging model.Refer to the documentation of the JMS provider or JMS specifications for more information about JMSand its message models.

Common JMS Properties and HeadersJMS properties comprise message headers and message properties. MessageHeader properties are setby the JMS client sending the message. You can view these after the message is received. You can alsoset MessageProperties on the outgoing messages on the Input tab of the activity that sends messages.

Message Headers

The following table describes the messages headers.

MessageHeadersProperty Dataype Description

JMSDestination string The destination where the message is sent.

JMSReplyTo string The JMS destination where the reply message shouldbe sent.

JMSDeliveryMode string The delivery mode of the message. Can be one of thefollowing:

● PERSISTENT: signifies the messages are stored andforwarded.

● NON_PERSISTENT: messages are not stored andmay be lost due to failures in transmission.

JMSMessageID string The unique ID of the message.

JMSTimestamp long The time a message was handed off to a JMS providerto be sent. The time is expressed as the amount of time,in milliseconds, since midnight, January 1, 1970, UTC.

JMSExpiration long The expiration time of the message. The time isexpressed as the amount of time, in milliseconds sincemidnight, January 1, 1970, UTC. If set to 0, the messagedoes not expire.

JMSRedelivered boolean Typically this item is set when the JMS provider hasdelivered the message at least once before.

170


MessageHeadersProperty Dataype Description

JMSPriority integer The priority of the message. Priority is a value from 0-9.Higher numbers signify a higher priority (that is, 9 is ahigher priority than 8).

JMSCorrelationID string This ID is used to link a response message with itsrelated request message. This is usually the message IDof a request message when this field is found in a replymessage.

JMSType string The JMS provider-supplied string to describe the typeof the message. Some JMS providers use this propertyto define messages in the provider’s repository. See theJMS provider documentation for more informationabout the use of this field.

Message Properties

The following table describes the messages properties.

MessageProperties Dataype Description

JMSXUserID string The ID of the user sending the message.

This property is optionally set on incoming messagesby the JMS application. This property is not set onoutgoing messages.

JMSXAppID string The ID of the application sending the message.


JMSXProducerTIXID string The transaction identifier of the transaction where thismessage was produced.


JMSXConsumerTXID string The transaction identifier of the transaction where thismessage was consumed.


JMSXRcvTimestamp integer The time the JMS server delivered the message to theconsumer. The time is expressed as the amount of time,in milliseconds since midnight, January 1, 1970, UTC.

This property is optionally set on incoming messagesby the JMS server. This property is not set on outgoingmessages.

171


MessageProperties Dataype Description

JMSXDeliveryCount integer The number of delivery attempts for this message.

JMSXGroupID string The identity of the message group this message is apart of.

You can set this property on outgoing messages togroup messages into a numbered sequence.

JMSXGroupSeq integer The sequence number of this message in its group.

You can set this property on outgoing messages togroup messages into a numbered sequence.

Get JMS Queue MessageGet JMS Queue Message is an asynchronous activity that retrieves a message from the specifiedqueue. You can use this activity to perform a receive operation on the queue as opposed to waiting for aqueue message to be delivered to the Wait for JMS Queue Message activity.

You can use the Message Selector field on the Advanced tab to retrieve a specific queue message fromthe queue.

General


Field



JMS Connection Literal Value

ModuleProperty

The JMS connection. For details refer to, JMS Connection.

Destination Yes The name of the queue from which to retrieve the message.

The syntax of the destination name is specific to the JMSprovider you are using. See the JMS providerdocumentation for more information about queue names.

172


Field


Message Type Yes The type of the message which can be one of the following:

● Text: The message is a java.lang.String.

● Bytes: A stream of bytes.● Map: A set of name or value pairs. The names are

strings, and the values are simple datatypes (JAVAprimitives), an array of bytes (use the Binary datatypewhen mapping this data), or a string. Each item can beaccessed sequentially or by its name.

● Object: A Java object that can be serialized.● Object Ref: An object reference to a Java object.● Simple: A message with no body part.● Stream: A stream of Java primitives, strings, or arrays

of bytes. Each value must be read sequentially.● XML Test: The message is XML text.

173


Field


AcknowledgmentMode

Yes The acknowledge mode for incoming messages. It can beone of the following:

● Auto: the mode where the message is automaticallyacknowledged, when it is received.

● Client: the mode where the message is acknowledgedat a later point by using the Confirm activity. If themessage is not confirmed before the process instanceends, the message is redelivered and a new processinstance is created to handle the new incomingmessage. Ensure that your process confirms themessage when using this acknowledge mode.

● Dups OK: the mode where the message isacknowledged automatically when it is received. JMSprovides this mode for lazy acknowledgment, butTIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks acknowledgesmessages upon receipt.

● TIBCO EMS Explicit Client: (only available for TIBCOEnterprise Message Service) a message which is notacknowledged using the Confirm activity before theprocess instance ends, is redelivered instead of allmessages in the session. The session is not blocked andone session handles all incoming messages for eachprocess instance.

● TIBCO EMS EXPLICIT Client Dups OK: (onlyavailable for TIBCO Enterprise Message Service) amessage which is not acknowledged using the Confirmactivity before the process instance ends, is redeliveredinstead of all messages in the session. The session is notblocked and one session handles all the incomingmessages for each process instance. The messageshowever, are lazily acknowledged.

● TIBCO EMS No Acknowledge: messages deliveredusing this mode do not require acknowledgment.Hence, the messages in this mode are not redeliveredregardless of whether the delivery was successful.

Description

Provide a short description for the activity here.

Advanced


174


Field

Literal Value/ProcessProperty? Description

Message Selector Yes A string to determine whether a message should bereceived. The syntax of the message selector is determinedby the JMS provider (where message properties are usedinstead of table column names).

See the JMS provider documentation for more informationand syntax for a message selector string.

ApplicationProperties Type

None The type of application-specific message properties that ispart of the message.

Output Editor

The Output Editor tab defines the schema to use for messages of type Map, Stream, or XML Text. Mapmessages are name or value pairs, and using this schema you can define the structure of the retrieveddestination queue message. The schema defined on the Output Editor tab becomes the body of themessage on the Output tab. For XML Text message type, select an XSD element. For Map and Streammessage types, select an XSD type in the Output Editor tab.

Input



destinationQueue

string The queue to which to send the request. This input itemoverrides the Destination field on the General tab.

timeout integer Specifies how long the message can remain active (in seconds).If set to 0, the message does not expire.

selector string A string to determine whether a message should be received.The value of this element overrides any value specified in theMessage Selector field of the Advanced tab. The syntax of themessage selector is determined by the JMS provider, but it isusually a subset of SQL92 (where message properties are usedinstead of table column names).

See the JMS provider documentation for more information andsyntax for a message selector string.

Output



JMSHeaders complex The message header fields for the message. See Common JMSProperties and Headers for more information about messageheader fields.

Only properties applicable to this type of message are displayed.

175



JMSProperties complex The message properties for the message. See Common JMSProperties and Headers for more information about messageproperties.


Body as permessage type

The body of the message.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

JMSInvalidInputException The input to the activity is not valid.

JMSSessionCreateException The JMS session could not be created.

JMSReceiveException The JMS receive operation failed.

ActivityTimedOutException The specified timeout is attained and the activity has notcompleted its execution.

JMS Receive MessageJMS Receive Message is a process starter activity that starts the process based on the receipt of amessage for the specified JMS destination.

General


Field



Messaging Style Yes Select from one of the following available messaging styleoptions:

● Generic: This options corresponds to an abstract JMSDestination. If you are not sure whether yourdestination is a Queue or Topic, select Generic.

● Queue● Topic

176


Field


JMS Connection None The JMS connection. See JMS Connection for moreinformation.

Destination Yes The JMS destination from where the process starterreceives the message.

Message Type None The type of the message. This can be one of the following:

● Text: the message is a java.lang.String.

● Byte: a stream of bytes.● Map: a set of name or value pairs. The names are


● Object: a Java object that can be serialized.● Object Ref: an object reference to a Java object.● Simple: a message with no body part.● Stream: a stream of Java primitives, strings, or arrays of

bytes. Each value must be read sequentially.● XML Test: the message is XML text.

Durable Subscriber Yes Specifies a durable subscription.

You must specify a name in the Subscription Name fieldthat is registered with the JMS application as the durablesubscriber name. This field is only available if theMessaging Style is Generic or Topic.

Subscription Name Yes The subscription name registered with the JMS applicationfor durable subscriptions. This field is only available whenyou select the Durable Subscriber check box.

After creating a durable subscription you can only beremove this by accessing the administration tool of the JMSprovider. See the documentation of the JMS provider formore information about managing durable subscriptions.

177


Field


Suppress LocalMessages

Yes Specifies to not receive messages on the specified topicname when the message origin is the JMS application onthe same connection as the process engine.

If the process publishes and subscribes to messages withthe same topic name, this option is useful if you want tospecify whether to receive messages sent by the same JMSapplication that published the message.

Selecting this check box prevents the process fromreceiving messages sent by the same connection.

Keep this check box clear to specify that the messages sentby the same connection should be received.

178


Field


Acknowledge Mode Yes The acknowledge mode for incoming messages. It can beone of the following:

● Auto: the message is automatically acknowledged,when it is received.

● Client: the message is acknowledged at a later point byusing the Confirm activity. If the message is notconfirmed before the process instance ends, themessage is redelivered and a new process instance iscreated to handle the new incoming message. Ensurethat your process confirms the message when using theacknowledge mode.

● Dups Ok: the message is acknowledged automaticallywhen it is received. JMS provides this mode for lazyacknowledgment, but TIBCO ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks acknowledges messages upon receipt.

● TIBCO EMS Explicit Client: (only available for TIBCOEnterprise Message Service) a message which is notacknowledged using the Confirm activity before theprocess instance ends, will be redelivered instead of allmessages in the session. The session is not blocked andone session handles all incoming messages for eachprocess instance.

● TIBCO EMS Explicit Client Dups OK: (only availablefor TIBCO Enterprise Message Service) a messagewhich is not acknowledged using the Confirm activitybefore the process instance ends, will be redeliveredinstead of all messages in the session. The session is notblocked and one session handles all the incomingmessages for each process instance. The messageshowever, are lazily acknowledged.

● TIBCO EMS No Acknowledge: messages deliveredusing this mode do not require acknowledgment.Therefore, messages in this mode are not redeliveredregardless of whether the delivery was successful.

Description


Advanced


179


Field


Message Selector Yes A string to determine whether a message should bereceived. The syntax of the message selector is determinedby the JMS provider.

See the JMS provider documentation for more informationand syntax for a message selector string.


None Any application-specific message properties that is part ofthe message. This is specified by the JMS applicationproperties shared configuration object.

Polling Interval (sec) None Specifies the polling interval to check for new messages. Ifno value is specified for the property, the default pollinginterval is one second.

Set a value in this field to specify the polling interval (inseconds) for this activity. The value in this field overridesthe default polling interval.

Sequence Key None This field can contain an XPath expression that specifieswhich processes should run in sequence. Process instanceswith sequencing keys that evaluate to the same value areexecuted in the sequence the process instances werecreated.

Custom Job Id None This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies acustom ID for the process instance.

Output Editor

The Output Editor tab defines the schema to use for incoming messages whose Message Type is Map,Stream, or XML Text. Map messages are name or value pairs, and you can use the schema to define thestructure of the incoming message. The schema on the Output Editor tab becomes the structure usedfor the body of the message displayed on the Output tab. For XML Text message type, select an XSDelement. For Map and Stream message types, select an XSD type in the Output Editor tab.

Conversations

You can initiate and join the conversation here. Click the Add New Conversation button to initiatemultiple conversations.

Output


180









JMS Request ReplyJMS Request Reply is an asynchronous activity that is used to send a request to a JMS destination andwait for a response from the JMS client.

This activity uses temporary destinations to ensure that reply messages are received only by theprocess that sent the request. However, the user has the ability to use preexisting JMS destinations.

General


Field



Messaging Style Yes Select from one of the following available options:

● Generic● Queue● Topic


Destination Yes The name of the destination of the outgoing message.

181


Field





strings, and the values are simple datatypes (JAVAprimitives), an array of bytes (use the Binary datatypewhen mapping this data), or a string. You can accesseach item sequentially or by its name.



Description

Privide a short description for the activity here.

Advanced


Field Description

Reply To Destination The destination to use for replies for this activity.

If more than one job has the same Reply To Destination, each jobmay not receive the correct reply. Ensure to specify an expressionin this field that assigns a different Reply To Destination to eachprocess instance.

Deliver Mode The delivery mode of the message. Can be one of the following:

● Persistent: signifies that the messages are stored and forwarded.● Non_Persistent: signifies that the messages are not stored and may be

lost due to transmission failure.● TIBCO_EMS_Reliable_Delivery: this mode is only available when

using TIBCO Enterprise Message Service. See the TIBCO EnterpriseMessage Service documentation for more information.

182


Field Description

JMS Expiration(sec) Corresponds to the JMSExpiration property that specifies how long themessage can remain active (in seconds).

If set to 0, the message does not expire.

This field is set in seconds, but the JMSExpiration property is displayed inmilliseconds.

Priority The priority of the message. You may set the priority to a value from 0-9.The default value is 4.

Type The value to supply to the JMSType header property.


Any application-specific message properties that is part of the message. Thisis specified by the JMS application properties shared configuration object.

Input Editor and Output Editor

The Input Editor and Output Editor tabs define the schema to use for messages of type Map, Stream,or XML Text. Map messages are name or value pairs, and you can use the schema to define thestructure of the outgoing request and the incoming reply. The schema defined on the Input Editor tabbecomes the body of the message on the Input tab. The schema defined on the Output Editor tabbecomes the body of the message on the Output tab. For XML Text message type, select an XSDelement. For Map and Stream message types, select an XSD type in the Input Editor or Output Editor.

Input



Destination string The destination to which to send the request. This inputitem overrides the Destination field on the General tab.

replyTo string The destination to use for replies for this activity.

If more than one job has the same Reply ToDestination, then each job may not receive thecorrect reply. Ensure to specify an expressionin this field that assigns a different Reply ToDestination to each process instance.

JMSExpiration integer Specifies how long the message can remain active (inseconds). If set to 0, the message does not expire.

JMSPriority string The priority of the message. This item overrides thepriority set on the Advanced tab.

183




● Persistent: signifies that the messages are stored andforwarded.

● Non_Persistent: signifies that the messages are notstored and may be lost due to transmission failure.

● TIBCO_EMS_Reliable_Delivery: this mode is onlyavailable when using TIBCO Enterprise MessageService. See the TIBCO Enterprise Message Servicedocumentation for more information.

JMSCorrelationID string This ID is used to link a response message with its relatedrequest message. This is usually the message ID of arequest message when this field exists in a reply message.

JMSType string The type of the message. This item overrides the valuespecified on the Advanced tab.

JMSProperties complex The message properties. For details, refer to CommonJMS Properties and Headers.

Body depends on themessage type


Output









Fault


184


Fault Thrown When..

JMSInvalidInputExceptio

n

The input to the activity is not valid.

JMSMessageCreateExcepti

on

The JMS message could not be created.

JMSSessionCreateExcepti

on

The JMS session could not be created.

JMSSendException The JMS send operation failed.

JMSReceiveException The JMS receive operation failed.


on

The specified timeout has been attained and the activity has notcompleted its execution.

JMS Send MessageJMS Send Message is a synchronous activity that sends a message to the specified JMS destination.

General


Field



Messaging Style None Select from one of the following available options:



Destination Yes The name of the destination of the outgoing message.

185


Field




● Byte: a stream of bytes.● Map: a set of name or value pairs. The names are strings,

and the values are simple datatypes (JAVA primitives),an array of bytes (use the Binary datatype whenmapping this data), or a string. Each item can beaccessed sequentially or by its name.



Description


Advanced


Field Description

Reply ToDestination

The destination to use for replies for this activity.

If more than one job has the same Reply To Destination, each jobmay not receive the correct reply. Ensure to specify an expressionin this field that assigns a different Reply To Destination to eachprocess instance.

Deliver Mode The delivery mode of the message. Can be one of the following:

● Persistent: signifies that the messages are stored and forwarded.● Non_Persistent: signifies that the messages are not stored and may be lost

due to transmission failure.● TIBCO_EMS_Reliable_Delivery: this mode is only available when using

TIBCO Enterprise Message Service. See the TIBCO Enterprise MessageService documentation for more information.

186


Field Description




Priority The priority of the message. You may set the priority to a value from 0-9. Thedefault value is 4.

Type The value to supply to the JMSType header property.


Any application-specific message property that is part of the message. This isspecified by the JMS application properties shared configuration object.


Overrides the default behavior of a transaction group. If this activity is in atransaction group, the JMS message is normally committed or rolled backwith the other participants in the transaction.

If this check box is selected, the JMS message does not participate in thetransaction.

Input Editor

The Input Editor tab defines the schema to use for outgoing messages whose message type is Map,Stream, or XML Text. Map messages are name or value pairs, and you can use the schema to define thestructure of the outgoing message. After defining the schema on the Input Editor tab, it becomes thestructure used for the body of the message displayed on the Input tab. For the XML Text message type,select an XSD element. For Map and Stream message types, select an XSD type in the Input Editor tab.

Input



Destination string The destination to which to send the message. This inputitem overrides the Destination field on the General tab.


If more than one job has the same Reply ToDestination, each job may not receive thecorrect reply. Ensure to specify an expressionin this field that assigns a different Reply ToDestination to each process instance.



187












Output



MessageID string The unique identifier of the message.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..


n



on



on



188


Reply to JMS MessageReply To JMS Message is a synchronous activity that sends a reply to a previously received JMS queueor topic message. The Reply For Event field in the General tab lists the activities that can receive theJMS message. The activity you select determines the response of the reply message.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label of the activity.

Reply For Event A drop-down list of activities that can receive JMS queue or topic messages.The activity you select determines the message this activity replies to. Thereply-to queue or topic name from the message in the selected activity is usedto send the reply message. The listed activity is WaitforJMSRequest.

Message Type The type of the message. This can be one of the following:


● Byte: a stream of bytes.● Map: a set of name or value pairs. The names are strings, and the values are

simple datatypes (JAVA primitives), an array of bytes (use the Binarydatatype when mapping this data), or a string. Each item can be accessedsequentially or by its name.

● Object: a Java object that can be serialized.● Object Ref: an object reference to a Java object.● Simple: a message with no body part.● Stream: a stream of Java primitives, strings, or arrays of bytes. Each value

must be read sequentially.● XML Test: the message is XML text.

Description


Advanced


189


Field Description

Deliver Mode The delivery mode of the message. This can be one of the following:

● Persistent: signifies that the messages are stored and forwarded.● Non_Persistent: signifies that the messages are not stored and may be lost

due to transmission failure.● TIBCO_EMS_Reliable_Delivery: this mode is only available when using

TIBCO Enterprise Message Service. See the TIBCO Enterprise MessageService documentation for more information.




Priority The priority of the message. You may set the priority to a value from 0-9. Thedefault value is 4.

JMSType The value to supply to the JMSType header property.


Any application-specific message property that is part of the message. This isspecified by the JMS application properties shared configuration object.

Input Editor

The Input Editor tab defines the schema to use for outgoing messages whose message type is Map,Stream, or XML Text. Map messages are name or value pairs, and you can use the schema to define thestructure of the outgoing message. After defining the schema on the Input Editor tab, it becomes thestructure used for the body of the message displayed on the Input tab. For XML Text message type,select an XSD element. For Map and Stream message type, select an XSD Type in the Input Editor tab.

Input



Destination string The destination to which to send the request. This inputitem overrides the Destination field on the General tab.


If more than one job has the same Reply ToDestination, each job may not receive thecorrect reply. Ensure to specify an expressionin this field that assigns a different Reply ToDestination to each process instance.


190













Fault


Fault Thrown When..


n



on



on



191


Wait for JMS RequestWait for JMS Request is a signal-in activity that waits for the receipt of a message for the specified JMSdestination.

General


Field



Messaging Style Yes Select from one of the following available options:



Destination Yes The destination from which a reply to this message shouldbe received.







192


Field


Durable Subscriber Yes Specifies a durable subscription.

Specify a name in the Subscription Name field that isregistered with the JMS application as the durablesubscriber name. This field is only available, if theMessaging Style is Generic or Topic.

Subscription Name Yes The subscription name registered with the JMS applicationfor durable subscriptions. This field is only available whenthe Durable Subscriber check box is selected.

After a durable subscription is created, it can only beremoved by accessing the administration tool of the JMSprovider. See the documentation of the JMS provider formore information about managing durable subscriptions.

Suppress LocalMessages

Yes Specifies to not receive messages on the specified topicname when the message origin is the JMS application onthe same connection as the process engine.

If your process publishes and subscribes to messages withthe same topic name, this option is useful if you want tospecify whether to receive messages sent by the same JMSapplication that published the message.

Selecting this check box prevents the process fromreceiving messages sent by the same connection.

Keep this check box clear to specify that the messages sentby the same connection should be received.

193


Field


Acknowledge Mode Yes The acknowledge mode for incoming messages. It can beone of the following:

● Auto: the message is automatically acknowledged,when it is received.

● Client: the message is acknowledged at a later point byusing the Confirm activity. If the message is notconfirmed before the process instance ends, themessage is redelivered and a new process instance iscreated to handle the new incoming message. Ensurethat your process confirms the message when using thisacknowledge mode.

● Dups Ok: the message is acknowledged automaticallywhen it is received. JMS provides this mode for lazyacknowledgment, but TIBCO ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks acknowledges messages upon receipt.

● TIBCO EMS Explicit Client: (only available for TIBCOEnterprise Message Service) a message which is notacknowledged using the Confirm activity before theprocess instance ends, is redelivered instead of allmessages in the session. The session is not blocked andone session handles all incoming messages for eachprocess instance.

● TIBCO EMS Explicit Client Dups OK: (only availablefor TIBCO Enterprise Message Service) a messagewhich is not acknowledged using the Confirm activitybefore the process instance ends, is redelivered insteadof all messages in the session. The session is notblocked and one session handles all the incomingmessages for each process instance. The messageshowever, are lazily acknowledged.

● TIBCO EMS No Acknowledge: messages deliveredusing this mode do not require acknowledgment.Therefore messages in this mode are not redeliveredregardless of whether the delivery was successful.

Description


Event


194


Field Description


This field specifies the amount in seconds. If no value is specified in this field,the message waits indefinitely. If zero is specified, the event is discardedimmediately, unless this activity has already been executed.


This field specifies the amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait if the filechange occurs before this activity is executed in the process instance. If theevent timeout expires, an error is logged and the event is discarded.

Advanced


Field Description

Message Selector A string to determine whether a message should be received. The syntax ofthe message selector is determined by the JMS provider.

See the JMS provider documentation for more information and syntax for amessage selector string.


Any application-specific message properties that is part of the message. Thisis specified by the JMS application properties shared configuration object.

Output Editor

The Output Editor tab defines the schema to use for messages of type Map, Stream, or XML Text. Mapmessages are name or value pairs, and using this schema you can define the structure of the retrievedqueue message. The schema defined on the Output Editor tab becomes the body of the message on theOutput tab.

Conversations

You can initiate and join the conversation here. Click the Joining existing conversation button tojoin existing conversations.

Output







195





Fault


Fault Thrown When..


on

The specified timeout has been attained and the activity has notcompleted its execution.

196


Mail Palette

The Mail Palette is used to receive incoming emails or send outgoing emails.

Receive MailReceive Mail is a process starter activity that polls a POP3 mail server for the new mail. After detectingand retrieving a new mail, the Receive Mail activity starts the process.

General


Field

LiteralValue/ModuleProperty/ProcessProperty Description


Host Yes The host name or IP address for the mail server.

Port Yes The default port (110) used to connect to POP3 server.

User Name Yes The username for logging into the POP3 server.

Password Yes The password for logging into the POP3 server.

PollingInterval(sec)

Yes The polling interval (in seconds) to check for new mail. The default is5, if no polling interval is specified.

Delete Mail None Select this check box to delete the mail from the POP3 server afterprocess starter has retrieved it.

To delete mail, place a Checkpoint activity immediatelyafter the Receive Mail process starter. This ensures that themessage is not lost in the event of a machine failure.

Alternatively, you can leave this field clear.

EnableConfidentiality

None This check box specifies whether a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Clientshould be used to specify the SSL configuration. When this check boxis selected, the SSL Client field displays.

SSL Client Yes The name of the resource. In the SslClientResource ResourceTemplate wizard, create a resource to connect to the SSL client.

Test Connection Button

The Test Connection button tests the connection to the specified mail server. Use this button to ensurethat your Receive Mail activity is properly configured to receive mail from the specified mail server.This button is enabled only when the Host, User Name, and Password fields on the General tab arepopulated.

197


Description

Provide a short description of the process in this field.

Advanced

The Advanced tab contains the following fields:

Field Description

SequencingKey

Contains an XPath expression that specifies which process runs in a sequence.Process instances with sequencing keys evaluating to the same value, are executedin the sequence the process instance was created.

Custom Job id This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies a custom ID for theprocess instance.

Provide RawMessage

When selected, this field specifies the whole message to be provided in the binaryform. The output schema changes to include an element named rawMessage thatcontains the message instead of bodyText and mimeEnvelopeElements.

The Receive Mail process starter uses the javax.mail API. This API assumes thatthe content type of the message is multipart/mixed. When the multipart subtypeis not mixed (such as multipart/signed or multipart/alternative) or whenanother content type is used (for example, application/*), the javax.mail APImay not correctly parse the message.

Select this check box to send the raw message to a Java Invoke activity that usesthe Java activation framework to implement the appropriate handlers to processthe message. For more information on how the Java activation framework can beused for this purpose, refer to the API documentation for javax.activation andjavax.mail.

You can also feed the binary message to the javax.mail.MimeMessage constructorin the form of a java.io.InputStream to construct a MimeMessage object. Thedefault javax.mail API handler is used in such a case.

Write to File Select this check box to specify that the incoming messages whose body andattachments (or raw message size, if Provide Raw Message is selected) exceed thespecified threshold size, must be written to a file instead of being stored inmemory. You can accept large incoming messages without consuming morememory. The incoming message is written to the file with mail headers when bodyand attachment exceeds the specified size.

Selecting this check box displays the Directory, Creating Non-Existing Directories,and Threshold Size fields.

Do not select to keep the incoming messages in memory.

The files created by using this option are not deleted automatically. Youmust manage the storage used by these files and delete them when theyare no longer used.

Directory The directory to write messages that are above the specified threshold. The processengine does not attempt to create the directory, if the specified directory does notexist. Therefore, create the directory before starting the process engine.

198


Field Description


The directory to write messages that are above the specified threshold.

If the specified directory does not exist, the process engine does not attempt tocreate the directory. Therefore, select the check box to create the directory beforestarting the process engine.

Not selecting this check box with one or more non-existing directories in thespecified path in the Directory field, raises an exception.

ThresholdData Size(bytes)

The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming message that can be kept in memory.Messages larger than the specified size are written to a file in the specifieddirectory. The file name is an output so that the subsequent activities in the processproperties can access the file and read its contents.

Specifying zero (0) in this field determines all incoming messages to be saved to afile.

Output Editor

Incoming messages may contain custom headers. From the Output Editor tab, define a custom schemafor the headers of the incoming mail messages. You can also specify any standard header supported bythe javax.mail package. For example, X-Mailer or X-Priority. Values of headers in the incomingmessage populates the corresponding defined output headers of the same name.

Conversations

You can initiate the conversation here. Click the Add New Conversation button to initiate multipleconversations. For details about conversations, refer to Application Development.

Output



from string The email address of the sender of the email.

to string The recipient list of the email.

cc string The cc (carbon copy) list of the email.

replyTo string The reply to list of the email.

subject string The subject of the email.

sentdate string The date the email was sent.

Headers complex This element contains the schema you defined on the Output Editortab. You can specify custom headers that can be included in theincoming mail messages.

199



bodyElement string Contains a choice element.

You can either provide the bodyText element or fileName element.

mimeEnvelopeElement

complex This field is available when the Provide Raw Message check box onthe Advanced tab is not selected.

Contains the message attachments. This element contains arepeating element named mimePart that comprises each mimeattachment.

mimeHeaders complex This element contains the mime header for each mimePart.

mimeHeaders contain the following information:

● content-disposition - To suggest a filename for an attachment,use "*;filename=<filename>" in this element.

E-mail servers may alter or ignore the suggested name.



When the contentType is specified as "text/*" (forexample, "text/xml"), specify the attachment content ineither the textContent input element or the file namestoring the attachment in the fileName input element.When the contentType is anything other than "text/*":● The attachment content must be in the binaryContent

input element.● The file name storing the attachment must be in the

fileName input element.

binaryContent |fileName |textContent

choice This element contains the mime attachment. It can be any of thefollowing:

● binaryContent: the content of the attachment when theattachment is binary data.

● fileName: the file name of the attachment written on the disk.● textContent: the content of the attachment when the attachment

is text data.

200



Send MailSend Mail is a synchronous activity that sends an email by way of an SMTP server.

General


Field



SMTPProperty

Yes The property name of the SMTP server.

If your server is configured for using a different port, specify it inthis field.

Description

Provide a short description of the Send Mail activity here.

Advanced


Field Description

Allow Non-Standard EmailIDs

By default, email IDs specified in the to, from, cc, bcc, or replyTo input elementsmust conform to the RFC 822 standard for email addresses.

Select this check box to specify email IDs that do not conform to the RFC 822standard. This is useful for sending mail to a server that has extensions forsending email to devices such as a fax machine.

For more information about email address syntax, see http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc822.html.

When this field is not selected, not all of the RFC 822 syntax rules areenforced. For example, addresses composed of simple names (with no"@domain" part) are allowed.

For more information on enforcing RFC 822, see the description of the strict flagof the parse method of javax.mail.internet.InternetAddress at http://javamail.kenai.com/nonav/javadocs/javax/mail/internet/InternetAddress.html.

Input Editor

You may want to add custom headers to outgoing mail messages. From the Input Editor tab you candefine a custom schema for the headers of the outgoing mail message. You can specify any standardheader supported by the javax.mail package. For example, X-Mailer or X-Priority.

Input


201




http://javamail.kenai.com/nonav/javadocs/javax/mail/internet/InternetAddress.html

http://javamail.kenai.com/nonav/javadocs/javax/mail/internet/InternetAddress.html


username string The username to use when authenticating to the mail server.

password string The password to use when authenticating to the mail server.

from string The email address of the sender.

to string The recipient list for the email. Use this repeatable element tosend mail to more than one recipient.

Provide a list of "to" recipients in a single string by using either acomma or a semicolon (but not both in the same string) asdelimiters.

cc string The "cc" (carbon copy) list for the email. Use this repeatableelement to place more than one recipient on the "cc" list, ifrequired.

Provide a list of "cc" recipients in a single string by using either acomma or a semicolon (but not both in the same string) asdelimiters.

bcc string The "bcc" (blind carbon copy) list for the email. Use thisrepeatable element to place more than one recipient on the "bcc"list.

Provide a list of "bcc" recipients in a single string by using either acomma or a semicolon (but not both in the same string) asdelimiters.

replyTo string The "replyTo" list for the email. Use this repeatable element toplace more than one recipient on the "replyTo" list.

Provide a reply to list in a single string by using either a commaor a semicolon (but not both in the same string) as delimiters toseparate the addresses in the list.

subject string The subject of the email.

sentDate string The date stamp for the email.

The email server provides the actual date stamp for theemail, so this input item is ignored. Do not attempt toplace a value in this input item.

bodyElement complex Contains a choice element.

You can either provide the bodyText element or fileNameelement.

bodyText string The text of the email message.

fileName string The file name of the attachment written to the disk.

202



Headers complex Contains the schema you defined on the Input Editor tab. Specifycustom headers for the outgoing mail messages.

Specify any standard header supported by the javax.mailpackage. For example, X-Mailer or X-Priority.

To use attachments, specify the Content-Type header asmultipart/* (where * is a valid subtype of the multipart).

contentType string The mime content type for the message. You can specify acharacter encoding in this element for the encoding of the body ofthe message.

mimeEnvelopeElement

complex Contains the message attachments.

mimePart complex This repeating element comprises each mime attachment.

mimeHeaders complex This element contains the mime header for each mimePart.

mimeHeaders contain the following information:

● content-disposition - To imply a filename for an attachment,use "*;filename=<filename>" in this element.

E-mail servers may alter or ignore the suggestedname.



When the contentType is specified as "text/*" (forexample, "text/xml"), specify the attachment content ineither the textContent input element or the file namestoring the attachment in the fileName input element.When the contentType is anything other than "text/*":● The attachment content must be in the

binaryContent input element.● The file name storing the attachment must be in the

fileName input element.

203




binaryContent |fileName |textContent

choice This element contains the mime attachment. It can be any of thefollowing:

● binaryContent: the content of the attachment when theattachment is binary data.

● fileName: the file name of the attachment written on the disk.● textContent: the content of the attachment when the

attachment is text data.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

InvalidInputException The input is not valid.

UnknownHostException The mail server host name is not resolved.

The exception contains the name of the mail server host.

SendFailedException The send operation failed for some reason.

204


Parse Palette

The Parse palette provides shared configuration resources for parsing and rendering theformatted text. This is useful if you want to transform the formatted lines of text into a data schema ortransform a data schema into a formatted text string.

The text lines can be formatted either by delimiters separating each field or offsets can be specified todetermine where each field begins and ends.

Parsing a Large Number of RecordsThe input for this activity is placed in a process variable and takes up memory as it is being processed.When reading a large number of records from a file, the process may consume significant machineresources. To avoid too much memory, you may want to read the input in parts, parsing andprocessing a small set of records before moving on to the next set of records.

This procedure is a general guideline for creating a loop group for parsing a large set of input recordsin parts. You may want to modify the procedure to include additional processing of the records, or youmay want to change the XPath expressions to suit your business process. If processing a large numberof records, do the following.

Procedure

1. Select and drop the Parse Data activity on the process editor.

2. On the General tab, specify the fields and select the Manually Specify Start Record check box.

3. Select the Parse Data activity and click the group icon on the tool bar to create a group containingthe Parse Data activity.

4. Specify Repeat Until True Loop as the Group action, and specify an index name (for example, "i").The loop must exit when the EOF output item for the Parse Data activity is set to true. Forexample, the condition for the loop can be set to the following: string($ParseData/Output/done) =string(true())

5. Set the noOfRecords input item for the Parse Data activity to the number of records you want toprocess for each execution of the loop.

If you do not select the Manually Specify Start Record check box on the General tab of the ParseData activity, the loop processes the specified noOfRecords with each iteration, until there are nomore input records to parse.

You can optionally select the Manually Specify Start Record check box to specify the startRecordon the Input tab. If you do this, you must create an XPath expression to properly specify thestarting record to read with each iteration of the loop. For example, the count of records in the inputstarts at zero, so the startRecord input item could be set to the current value of the loop index minusone. For example, $i - 1.

MimeParserThis activity is responsible for parsing MTOM messages into a SOAP message that contains binaryattachments as an inline data of the SOAP message. The output can be either in a Text or a Binaryformat.

General


205


Field Description


Input Style The input message format. (Currently only MTOM is available.)

Output Style The output message format.

You can select either Text or Binary format for the output messages.

Description


Advanced

The Advanced tab has the following.

Field Description

Generate Strict ParsingErrors

Select this check box to generate strict parsing validation errors.

Input



MimeBinaryData Binary This is the incoming binary data.

Output



soapMessage Binary or String Depends on the type selected in the Output Style format.

StrictValidationErrors

Complex This displays only when the Generate Strict Parsing Errorscheck box is selected.

ErrorString String Shows strict parsing validation error logs.

Fault



XOPParseException The input has XOP related exceptions.

206



MimeParseException The input has MIME related exceptions.

InvalidXMLException The input has invalid xml related exception.

Parse Data

The Parse Data activity takes a text string or input from a file and processes it by converting itinto a schema tree based on the specified Data Format shared resource.

You can use any mechanism to obtain or create a text string for processing. For example, you can usethe Read File activity to obtain text from a file. You can also use this activity to specify a text file to read.

You can use this activity in various scenarios. For example, a user has a file comprising multiple lineswith comma-separated values (as in data obtained from a spreadsheet) and this data has to be insertedinto a database table. In such a scenario, read and parse the file into a data schema with the Parse Dataactivity. Then, use JDBC Update activity to insert the data schema into a database table.

General




Data Format No The Data Format shared resource to use when parsing the textinput.

Input Type No Specify the type of input for this activity.

Input can either be String or File. If the input is a text string,provide the string to the text input item. If the input is a file,provide the file name and location to the fileName input item.

Encoding Yes The encoding of the input file.

To enable this field, select the File option in the Input Typefield . Any valid Java encoding name can be used.

Skip BlankSpaces

No Select this check box to skip any empty records when parsingthe text input.

When this check box is not selected, parsing stops at the firstblank line encountered in the input.

207



ManuallySpecify StartRecord

No You can specify the record in the input where you want to startparsing.

This is useful if you have a large number of records and youwant to read the input in parts (to minimize memory usage).

Selecting this check box displays the startRecord input item.See Parsing a Large Number of Records for more informationon how to read the input stream in parts.

StrictValidation

No Validates every input line for the specified number of fields forthe fixed format text.

For example, if the format states that there are three fields perline and this check box is selected, all lines in the input mustcontain three fields.

Continue OnError

No Continues parsing the next record in the input afterencountering an error, if any.

If an error occurs, the error information is separated from theoutput of the successfully parsed records and is provided in theoutput schema of the activity.

When this check box is not selected, the Parse Data activityquits parsing if an error is encountered while parsing therecords in the input.

Irrespective of whether this check box is selected or not, theParse Data activity quits when any data validation errorsoccur.

Input



text string The text string to parse.

This input item is available only when String is specified in theInput Type field of the General tab.

fileName string The location and name of the file to read. The file's content isused as the input text string for this activity.

This input item is available only when File is specified in theInput Type field of the General tab.

208



startRecord number The line number of the input stream to begin parsing. All linesbefore the specified line are ignored. This input item is availableonly if the Manual Specify Start Record check box on theGeneral tab is selected.

The input stream begins with the line number 1 (one). This isuseful for reading the input stream in parts to minimizememory usage.

See Parsing a Large Number of Records for more information.

noOfRecords number The number of records to read from the input stream. Specify -1if you want to read all records in the input stream.

This is useful for reading the input stream in parts to minimizememory usage.

See Parsing a Large Number of Records for more information.

SkipHeaderCharacters

integer The number of characters to skip when parsing. You can skipover any file headers or other unwanted information.

Output


Outputitem Datatype Description

Rows complex This output item contains the list of parsed lines from the input. This isuseful to determine the number of records parsed by this activity.

The schema specified by the Data Format resource is contained in thisoutput item.

schema complex The schema containing the data from the parsed input text. This outputitem contains zero or more parsed records.

ErrorRows This output item is available when you select Continue on Error, anderror(s) while parsing the records in the input.

Raw input data is put in the error string.

This field contains the list of error lines for the records from the inputthat failed parsing.

done boolean true if no more records are available for parsing. false if there aremore records available.

This output item is useful to check whether there are no more recordsin the input stream when reading the input in parts to preservememory.

209


Fault


Fault Thrown When..

FileNotFoundException The specified input file cannot be located.

BadDataFormatException The input format is not valid.

Render Data

The Render Data activity takes an input of a data schema and renders it as a text string. Theschema processed is based on a specified Data Format shared resource.

You can use this activity in various scenarios, for example, retrieving a result set from a database table.You may want to:

● Format this result set as a formatted text string (with line breaks between each row in the result set),and then write that text string out to a file.

● Use the Render Data activity to render the data schema as a formatted text string.● Use the Write File activity to write the string to a file.● Use the Render Data activity to render the data schema as a formatted text string.● Use the Write File activity to write the string to a file.

General




Data Format No The Data Format shared resource to use when rendering the textoutput.

Input



Rows complex The element containing the list of items to render.

root complex The complex element containing data schema (specified by the DataFormat shared resource) to render as a text string. This is a repeatingelement which renders more than one output record.

210


Output



text string The output text string as a result of rendering the specified dataschema. Line breaks separate records of the data schema.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

BadDataFormatException The output format is not valid.

211


Rendezvous Palette

Using the Rendezvous palette you can send and receive TIBCO Rendezvous messages. For moreinformation on TIBCO Rendezvous, see the TIBCO Rendezvous documentation.

Important: To run RV application on UNIX, set the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable and RV_HOMEspecifying the RV lib path.

Important: You must install TIBCO Rendezvous if you want to use the Rendezvous palette features.Refer to the product readme, readme.txt, for the supported versions.

Datatype ConversionWhen sending or receiving TIBCO Rendezvous messages, TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorksconverts the fields of the message to the correct datatypes. Data in the incoming TIBCO Rendezvousmessages is converted to TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks datatype (and represented in theactivity’s output). Data in an outgoing message is converted to TIBCO Rendezvous datatypes.

The following tables describe the corresponding datatypes between TIBCO ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks and TIBCO Rendezvous, depending upon whether TIBCO ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks is sending or receiving the message.

TIBCO Rendezvous to TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks Datatype Conversion

TIBCO Rendezvous Datatype XSD Dataype

TIBRVMSG_BOOL boolean

TIBRVMSG_I8 byte

TIBRVMSG_I16 short

TIBRVMSG_I32 int

TIBRVMSG_I64 long

TIBRVMSG_U8 unsignedByte

TIBRVMSG_U16 unsignedShort

TIBRVMSG_U32 unsignedInt

TIBRVMSG_U64 unsignedLong

TIBRVMSG_F32 float

TIBRVMSG_F64 double

TIBRVMSG_OPAQUE hexBinary or base64Binary, depending upon what is defined inthe schema.

TIBRVMSG_DATETIME date

TIBRVMSG_STRING string

212


TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks to TIBCO Rendezvous Datatype Conversion

XSD Datatype TIBCO Rendezvous Datatype

boolean TIBRVMSG_BOOL

byte TIBRVMSG_I8

short TIBRVMSG_I16

int TIBRVMSG_I32

long TIBRVMSG_I64

integer TIBRVMSG_I64

unsignedByte TIBRVMSG_U8

unsignedShort TIBRVMSG_U16

unsignedInt TIBRVMSG_U32

unsignedLong TIBRVMSG_U64

float TIBRVMSG_F32

double TIBRVMSG_F64

hexBinary or base64Binary,depending upon what is defined inthe schema.

TIBRVMSG_OPAQUE

date TIBRVMSG_DATETIME

dateTime TIBRVMSG_DATETIME

time TIBRVMSG_STRING

string TIBRVMSG_STRING

Field Names in MessagesA TIBCO Rendezvous message can contain field names that are not compliant with XML naming rules.For example, XML element names can neither begin with a number, nor can they contain specialcharacters, such as # or ^. When activities in the TIBCO Rendezvous palette send or receive messages,element names in the input schemas or output schemas for the activity must comply with XML namingrules. Any element in referenced schemas in the input schemas or output schemas is automaticallyaltered to comply with XML naming rules. From the XML-Compliant Field Names field, you canhandle the incoming or outgoing messages when the field names are not valid XML names.

When the XML-Compliant Field Names field is clear, any field name in the incoming or outgoingmessages not compliant with XML naming rules, is altered to comply with the rules. When this field isselected, field names in the message are left unaltered.

When publishing a message with XML-Compliant Field Names field not selected, the field names inthe message sent over the transport to the receiving application are altered to comply with XML

213


naming rules. By selecting this field, you can send the message with the original field names intact; noalterations are made to the field names. This is useful in the case where you reference a schema in theInput Editor tab that contains invalid XML names. The receiving application receives the message withthe original field names, if the XML-Compliant Field Names field is not selected.

When receiving a message, not selecting the XML-Compliant Field Names field ensures that fieldnames in the incoming message are altered to comply with XML naming rules. If the message containsfields that do not comply to XML naming rules, the output schema of the subscriber activity mustspecify the correct altered name to match the altered name of the field in the incoming message.Keeping the field clear leaves the field names of the message intact.

Not selecting the XML-Compliant Field Names field involves extra processing of incoming andoutgoing messages. If you are certain that messages contain only field names that comply with XMLnaming rules, you can clear this field to improve performance.

Globalization SupportTIBCO Rendezvous activities use bw.palette.messageEncoding property as the wire formatencoding.

If this property is not set, the default wire format encoding value which supports all the character set, isUTF-8. To change the wire format encoding other than UTF-8, set the bw.palette.messageEncodingproperty to the required encoding. In design time, you can specify the property in VM arguments ofDebug/Run Configurations like -Dbw.palette.messageEncoding=ISO8859-1 in the DebugConfigrations dialog. See the following screenshot for reference.

ISO8859-1 supports English and other western European languages that belong to ISO Latin-1 characterset. UTF-8 can send and receive characters that are not in the ASCII and Latin-1 character set.

In run time, you can specify the property in the config.ini file of the AppNode. For details, refer toTIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks Administration.

214


Rendezvous PublisherRendezvous Publisher is a synchronous activity that publishes a TIBCO Rendezvous message on thespecific subject with the specified message content.

General


Field



Subject Yes The subject on which to publish the TIBCO Rendezvous message.Specify a subject on the Input tab to override this value.

Transport Literal Value/ModuleProperty

The TIBCO Rendezvous transport parameters. These are specifiedas Rendezvous Transport shared configuration resource.

Pre RegisterListener

Yes When using TIBCO Rendezvous Certified Messaging (RVCM), thisfield specifies the cmnames of the RVCM subscribers. Thepublisher preregisters with any expected listeners. If multiplecmnames are specified, separate each cmname with a comma.

See the TIBCO Rendezvous documentation for more informationabout RVCM.

XML Format None If selected, the body of the TIBCO Rendezvous message is placedinto a single field named XML. This field is a byte array containingthe body of the message. The datatype of the field isTIBRVMSG_XML.

XMLCompliantField Names

None Specifies whether the field names of the outgoing message shouldbe altered so that they comply with XML naming rules.

Clear this check box to alter only the field names that do notcomply with XML naming rules. When selected, the field namesare left unaltered.

Description

Add a short description for the activity.

Input Editor

Define a schema element for the body of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

Input

The following is the input of this activity.

215


FieldDataSource Description

subject string The subject of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

replySubject string The subject to send replies for this TIBCO Rendezvous message. Thisis useful if you want to use the Wait for Rendezvous Messageactivity later in the process to receive replies to the message.

preRegisterListner

string When using TIBCO Rendezvous Certified Messaging (RVCM), thisfield specifies the cmnames of the RVCM subscribers. This allows thepublisher to pre-register with any expected listeners. If multiplecmnames are specified, separate each cmname with a comma. Anylisteners preregistered on the Transport tab are also preregisteredwith the listeners specified in this element.

body complex The body of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

This field displays only when any schema is provided in the InputEditor tab.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

TransportException The transport cannot be created.

SerializationException The message cannot be serialized.

RVPluginException An error occurred when sending the message.

Rendezvous Reply To RequestRendezvous Reply to Request is a synchronous activity that is used to send a reply to a receivedTIBCO Rendezvous message.

General


Field



216


Field


Reply to None The TIBCO Rendezvous activity or process starter that receivedthe request. This is a selection list of the following availableactivities that can receive TIBCO Rendezvous messages.

● RendezvousSubscriber● WaitForRendezvousMessage

Reply Subject Yes The reply subject of the received TIBCO Rendezvous message.You can override this value by specifying a subject on the Inputtab.


None Select this check box to specify whether the field names of theoutgoing message should be altered so that they comply with theXML naming rules.

Clear this check box to alter only the field names that do notcomply with XML naming rules. When selected, the field namesare left unaltered.

Description


Input Editor

Use the Input Editor tab to define a custom schema for the body of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

Conversations


Input



replySubject string The reply subject of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

RVPluginException An error occurred when sending the reply message.

217


Rendezvous SubscriberRendezvous Subscriber is a process starter activity that creates a process when a TIBCO Rendezvousmessage on the specified subject is received.

General


Field



Subject Yes The subject on which to listen for the TIBCO Rendezvousmessage.

Transport Literal Value/ModuleProperty

The TIBCO Rendezvous transport parameters. These are specifiedas a Rendezvous Transport shared resource.

XML Format None If you select this check box, the body of the incoming TIBCORendezvous message is a single field named "xml". This field is abyte array containing the body of the message.

TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks automatically deserializesthe xml field and represents the message as a schema tree in thisactivity’s output.

When selected, the Need Input Filteration check boxgets disabled.

Need OutputFilteration

None Specifies that only fields that match the name and datatype of theschema elements specified on the Output Editor tab should beprocessed. Any elements that do not match the specified schemaare ignored and not included in this activity’s output.

This is useful if you need only a subset of the fields of anincoming message. Any unnecessary fields are not included in theactivity output. This saves memory, and consequently improvesthe performance.

This option is valid, only when the XML Format checkbox is not selected. Do not select this check box whenthe XML Format check box is also selected.


None Specifies whether the field names of the incoming message shouldbe altered so that they comply with XML and ActiveEnterprisenaming rules. Only field names that do not comply with XML andActiveEnterprise naming rules are altered when this check box isnot selected. When selected, field names are left unaltered.

218


Field


Raw-RV-Object Mode

None Selecting this check box disables XML Format, Needs OutputFiltration, and XML-Compliant Field Names check boxes.

Select this check box to specify that the body of the RV message isthe output as a Java object reference. A subsequent Java Invokeactivity in the process can accept the reference as an inputparameter and then construct the RV message from the object. Touse the Java object, the Java Invoke activity must cast the objectreference as a byte array. For example:

TibrvMsg tibrvMsg = new

TibrvMsg ((byte[])in_var_1);

Where in_var_1 is the input parameter for the Java Invokeactivity that is mapped to the object reference of the objectcontaining the RV message.

Description


Advanced


Field Description

Sequence Key This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies which processes shouldrun in a sequence. Process instances with sequence keys that evaluate to thesame value, are executed sequentially in the sequence the process instance wascreated.

Custom Job Id This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies a custom job ID for theprocess instance.

Output Editor

Use the Output Editor tab to define a custom schema for the body of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

Conversations


Output


219



sendSubject string The subject of the received message.

replySubject string The reply subject of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

Rendezvous Request ReplyRendezvous Request Reply is an asynchronous activity that publishes a TIBCO Rendezvous messageon the specified subject with the specified message content. A reply to the message on the specifiedreply subject and with the specified reply message content is received by this activity. This activitywaits for a reply on the reply subject and outputs the content of the reply. This activity uses the INBOXmechanism to ensure that reply messages are received only by the process that sent the request.

General


Field



Subject Yes The subject on which to publish the TIBCO Rendezvousmessage. You can override this value by specifying a subject onthe Input tab.

Transport Yes The TIBCO Rendezvous transport parameters. These arespecified as a Rendezvous Transport shared configurationresource.

Request Timeout(msec)

Yes The length of time to wait (in milliseconds) for a reply to theTIBCO Rendezvous message. If no reply is received in thespecified time limit, it returns an error.

Pre-registerListener

Yes When using TIBCO Rendezvous Certified Messaging (RVCM),this field specifies the cmnames of the RVCM subscribers. Thesender can preregister with any expected listeners. If multiplecmnames are specified, separate each cmname with a comma.

See the TIBCO Rendezvous documentation for moreinformation about RVCM.

XML Format None If this check box selected, the body of the TIBCO Rendezvousrequest and reply messages is sent as a single field named"xml". This field is a byte array containing the body of themessage.

220


Field


Needs OutputFiltration

None Specifies that only fields in the reply message that match thename and datatype of the schema elements specified on theOutput Editor tab should be processed. Any elements that donot match the specified schema are ignored and not included inthis activity’s output.

This is useful if you need only a subset of the fields of a replymessage. Any unnecessary fields are not included in theactivity output. This saves memory, and consequentlyimproves performance.

This option is only valid when the XML Formatcheck box is not selected.

XML CompliantField Names forInput

None Specifies whether the field names of the input message shouldbe altered so that they comply with XML naming rules. Onlyfield names that do not comply with XML naming rules arealtered when this check box is not selected.

Select this check box if you want the field names to beunaltered.

XML CompliantField Names forOutput

None Specifies whether the field names of the outgoing messageshould be altered so that they comply with XML naming rules.Only field names that do not comply with XML naming rulesare altered when this check box is not selected.

Select this check box if you want the field names to beunaltered.

Description


Input Editor

In the Input Editor tab you can define custom schemas for the body of the outgoing TIBCORendezvous request and body of the incoming TIBCO Rendezvous response.

Output Editor

In the Output Editor tab you can define custom schemas for the body of the outgoing TIBCORendezvous request and body of the incoming TIBCO Rendezvous response.

Input



subject string The subject of the TIBCO Rendezvous message.

221



replySubject string The reply subject for this activity.

timeout number The amount of time to wait (in milliseconds) for a reply to theTIBCO Rendezvous message. If no reply is received in thegiven time limit, an error is returned.

Output



ReplySubject string A reply message can optionally have a reply subject,presumably so that the two applications can communicate withfurther messages. This element contains the reply subject set onthe reply message, if one is set. If no reply subject is set on thereply message, this element is not populated.

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions that can be thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for moreinformation about error codes and the corrective action to take.

Fault Thrown When..

TransportException The transport cannot be created.

SerializationException The message cannot be serialized.

RVPluginException An error occurred when sending the message.


on

A timeout has been reached.

Wait for Rendezvous MessageWait for Rendezvous Message activity waits to receive a TIBCO Rendezvous message with thespecified subject.

General


Field



222


Field


Subject Yes The subject on which to listen for the TIBCO Rendezvousmessage.

Transport Yes The TIBCO Rendezvous transport parameters. These arespecified as a Rendezvous Transport shared configurationresource.

XML Format None If this check box is selected, the body of the incoming TIBCORendezvous message is expected to be a single field named"xml". This field is a byte array containing the body of themessage.

TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks automatically deserializesthe xml field and represents the message as a schema tree inthis activity’s output.

Needs OutputFiltration

None Specifies that only fields that match the name and datatype ofthe schema elements specified on the Output Editor tab shouldbe processed.

Any elements that do not match the specified schema areignored and not included in this activity’s output.

XML-CompliantField Names

None Specifies whether the field names of the incoming messageshould be altered so that they comply with XML andActiveEnterprise naming rules. Only field names that do notcomply with XML naming rules are altered when you clear thischeck box.

Select this check box to leave the field names unaltered.

Description


Event


Field Description

Event Timeout (seconds) A message may arrive before this activity is executed. This fieldspecifies the amount of time (in seconds) a message waits if it isreceived before this activity is executed. If the event timeout expires,an error is logged and the event is discarded.

Activity Timeout (msec) Specify the amount of time (in milliseconds) for an activity to waitbefore it is executed.

223


Output Editor

From the Output Editor tab you can define custom schemas for the body of the outgoing TIBCORendezvous request and body of the incoming TIBCO Rendezvous response.

Conversations


Output

The Output tab has the following fields.


sendSubject string The subject of the received message

replySubject string The reply subject of the TIBCO Rendezvous message

Fault

The Fault tab lists the possible exceptions that can be thrown by this activity. See Error Codes for moreinformation about error codes and the corrective action to take.

Fault Thrown When..


on

A timeout has been reached.

224


REST and JSON

The activities of REST and JSON Palette can be used to invoke RESTful web services and exposeBusinessWorks processes as RESTful web services. The activities in this group can also be used toconvert data between JSON format and XML format.

BW JSON UtilsBW JSON utils provide an easier way to create XML schema (XSD files) from JSON payload or SQLstatements.

Create XSD Schema from JSON payload

To create schema from the available JSON payload:

1. In the Process package, click Schemas > BW JSON Utils > Create Schema from JSON payload.

2. Specify a Root Element name, in the JSON Payload to XSD dialog and click OK.

3. Specify a file name in the JSON Payload to XSD dialog and click OK.

4. Add the JSON payload and click OK.

5. The JSON to XSD Completed message window displays the JSON String is converted toSchema. The Schema has been created in the Schemas folder with name <Name>.xsd

message.

6. Verify whether <Name>.xsd file is created under the Schemas folder.

Create Schema from an SQL String

To create SQL schema, do the following:

1. In the Process package, click Resources > JDBC Connection Resource and verify whether the JDBCconnection is able to connect to the database successfully.

2. Right-click the fully configured JDBC Connection Resource > BW JSON Utils > Create Schemafrom SQL.

3. In the SQL Query Builder, provide the query statement to fetch the required information and clickOK.

4. A "Schema has been created successfully under the Schemas folder with <Name>.xsd."message is displayed.

Invoke REST APIInvoke REST API asynchronous activity invokes RESTful web services and receives responses fromthe service provider.

For the Invoke REST API activity to work, an HTTP Client shared resource is required. In the HTTPClient shared resource, make sure Apache HttpComponents(Supported by HTTP and REST) isselected as the Implementation Library in the HTTP Client section.

General


225


Field



HTTP Client Yes The HTTP client resource.

Resource Path None The resource of the REST service.

HTTP Method None The REST methods used for the requests.

Select from one of the following available methods:

● POST● GET● PUT● DELETE● Patch

Request Type None The value of the Content-Type header set while invoking theREST operation.

● JSON: the service provider returns the data in the JSONformat.

● XML: the service provider returns the data in the XMLformat.

● Custom: to override the Content-Type value in the Inputtab, select CUSTOM and provide the value in the Inputtab.

Response Type None The value of the Accept header set while invoking the RESTOperation.

● JSON: the service provider returns the data in the JSONformat.

● XML: the service provider returns the data in the XMLformat.

● Custom: to override the Accept header value in the Inputtab, select CUSTOM and provide the value in the Inputtab.

Description


Advanced


226


Field Description

Output HTTP ResponseHeaders

Request Entity Processing This field has two values:

● BUFFERED: the request entity is buffered in memory to determinethe content length that is sent as a Content-Length header in therequest.

● CHUNKED: the entity is sent as chunked encoded (no Content-length is specified, entity is streamed). The Transfer-Encodingheader is set to Chunked.

The default value is Chunked.

Input



Message Body The body of the HTTP request message.

asciiContent string The ASCII content (ascii content of the request like POST orPUT to the server) of the request to the HTTP server.

227



HttpHeaders string The header of the HTTP request. The header structure isdefined by the HTTP protocol. See the HTTP protocolspecification for more information about the fields andcontent of the header of an HTTP request.

● Accept: specifies the media types that are acceptable forresponse messages for the incoming request. For example,text/*,text/html. Media types are described in theHTTP specification.

● Accept-Charset: specifies the character sets that areacceptable for response messages for the incomingrequest. For example, iso-8859-5, unicode-1-1. Charactersets are described in the HTTP specification.

● Accept-Encoding: specifies the content-coding values thatare acceptable for response messages. For example,compress, gzip.

● Content-Type: the media type of the entity body sent tothe receiver. Media types are described in the HTTPspecification.

● Content-Length: indicates the size of the entity body sentto the receiver.

● Connection: the requestor can specify options desired forthis connection. For example, the option close specifiesthat the requestor would like the connection to be closedwhen the request is complete.

● Cookie: See the HTTP specification for more informationabout this field.

● Pragma: is used to include implementation-specificdirectives that might apply to the receiver. See the HTTPspecification for more information about using this field.

DynamicHeaders complex The dynamic header is an additional header parameter toadd runtime headers to the outgoing HTTP messages. TheDynamicHeaders consists of the following information:


Output

The Output tab has the following fields.


StatusCode The HTTP Response Code.

ReasonPhrase ReasonPhrase is intended for giving a short textual description ofStatusCode.

228



mesageBody The body of the response message. This is asciiContent.

Fault



HttpCommunicationExcep

tion

An HTTP exception occurred when trying to execute the specifiedmethod, or when trying to read the response.

HttpClientException The HTTP server replied with a message that has the 4XX status code.

HttpServerException The HTTP server replied with a message that has the 5XX status code.

Support for Path and Query Parameters

Invoke REST API activity supports both Path and Query parameters. For Path Parameters, encloseeach path parameter in { } brackets. For example, if the resource path is set as /books/{isbn}, aPathParameters element is added to the activity input.

Multiple path parameters can be defined in a similar way. The activity also supports static URL contentmixed with path parameters, for example, /books/{isbn}/events/{id}

Query parameters are defined using the pattern /staticUrl/?

A QueryParameters element is added to the Input tab of the activity with each of the parameter listed.

Restrictions on XML SchemaThis topic lists the restrictions on XML Schema.

Schema Restrictions

● No wildcards or attribute wildcards.● No foreign-namespace elements or attributes (single namespace).● Complex types may not contain both an attribute and a child element with the same local name.● Complex types may not be of the pattern "simple type plus attributes".

229


● Complex types may not contain mixed content.● Attributes that are not part of the default(empty) namespace, cannot be used for Complex Elements.● The 'choice' and 'sequence' compositors may not have maxOccurs > 1 (same as the restriction on

'all' in the schema specification).● Substitution groups are not allowed.● Element of simple type with an attribute is not allowed.

Restrictions on JSON

● Arrays must have homogeneous content.● Arrays cannot directly contain arrays ( [ [ ... ], [ ... ] ] )

Not currently supported

● JSON nulls● Binary content in JSON as a special case

Parse JSONParse JSON activity takes the JSON data, processes it, and converts it into XML data.

General


Field

LiteralValue/ProcessProperty/ModuleProperty Description

Name None The name to display as the label for the activity in the process.

Schema Type None Specifies the mode for the output data. The following are thesupported schema types:

● Generic: converts a JSON string to an XML string● XSD: converts a JSON string to an XML document defined

using a schema specified in the Output Editor.

The default value in this field is the XSD schema type.

Badgerfish None Specifies the following conversion rules:

● Select this check box for converting JSON data to XML datawith the mapping of XML namespace, XML attribute,CDATA, and so on.

● Do not select this check box if you want normal conversionrules for mapping data from JSON to XML.

230


Description


Output Editor

From the Output Editor you can define or reference an XML schema for the activity output. You canuse the BW JSON Utils tool to generate an XML schema file with a specified JSON file. Refer to BWJSON Utils for more information.

Input

The Input tab has the following fields.

Field Description

json string The input JSON data for translation.

Output

The output for the Parse JSON activity varies depending on the data schema you specified in theSchema Type field on the General tab.

Fault



JSONParserException An exception occurred when parsing the JSON data.

Render JSONRender JSON activity takes XML data and renders it as a JSON string.

General


Field



231


Field


Schema Type None Specifies a schema type for the output data. The following are thesupported schema types:

● Generic: converts an XML string to a JSON string● XSD: converts an XML string to a JSON document defined

using a schema specified in the Output Editor.

The default value in this field is the XSD schema type.

Badgerfish None Specifies the following conversion rules:

● Select this check box for converting JSON data to XML datawith the mapping of XML namespace, XML attribute,CDATA, and so on.

● Do not select this check box if you want normal conversionrules for mapping data from JSON to XML.

Description


Input Editor

From the Input Editor tab, you can define or reference an XML schema for the activity input. You canalso use the BW JSON Utils tool to generate an XML schema file with a specified JSON file. See BWJSON Utils for more information.

Input

The input data for the Render JSON activity is in the XML format. The schema type of the XML datavaries depending on the schema type you specified in the Schema Type field on the General tab.

Output

The Output tab contains the following field.

Field Description

jsonString The translated data in JSON string format.

Fault


232



JSONRendererException An exception occurred when rendering the data.

233


Shared Resources

Shared resources are used to define a resource that contains configuration data that can be referencedfrom multiple processes.

You can define a shared resource and then reference it from multiple activities in the same or differentprocess. For example, you can define a JDBC Connection resource and then use it in any of the JDBCactivities in your process to connect to the database.

Shared resources such as JDBC Connection, JMS Connection, HTTP Connection, and so on areavailable at design-time. At runtime, the referencing activities and event sources have full access totheir instances and configuration. Shared resources can be grouped in packages, similar to the wayprocess packages and Java packages are presented in the file system.

When defined in an application module, shared resources are not visible outside the applicationmodule. However, when defined in a shared module, they are visible outside the shared module.

For details, refer to General Concepts in TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks Concepts .

Data FormatThe Data Format shared resource contains the specification for parsing or rendering a text string usingthe Parse Data and Render Data activities. This resource specifies the type of formatting for the text(delimited columns or fixed-width columns), the column separator for delimited columns, the lineseparator, the fill character, and field offsets for fixed-width for fixed-width columns.

You must also specify the data schema to use for parsing or rendering the text. When parsing text, eachcolumn of an input line is transformed into the corresponding item in the specified data schema. Thefirst column of the text line is turned into the first item in the data schema, the second column istransformed into the second item, and so on. Each line is treated as a record, and multiple lines result ina repeating data schema containing the lines of the input text string. The following figure illustrateshow an input text string is parsed into a specified data schema.

Parsing a Text String into a Data Schema

When rendering text, each record in the input data schema is transformed into a line of output text. Thefirst item of the data schema is transformed into the first column of the text line in the output textstring. Rendering a data schema into a text string is exactly the opposite process of parsing a text stringinto a data schema.

234


Data Format Editor

This editor contains General, Data Format Configuration, Data Format Editor, and Field Offsetssections.

General

The General section has the following fields.

Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the resource.

Description A short description of the data format.

Data Format Configuration

You can define the structure of the data file using the Data Format Configuration.

Field Description

Format Type The Type of formatting for the text. The text can be either Delimiter separated orFixed format.

When you select the Delimiter separated option, the text in each column isseparated by a delimiter character, specified in the Col Separator field. Each line isseparated by the character specified in the Line Separator field.

When Fixed format option is selected, the text in each column occupies a fixedposition on the line. For fixed format text, you must specify the fill character, theline length, and the column offsets.

Col Separator This field specifies one or more separator characters between columns when"Delimiter separated" is specified in the Format Type field.

When rendering text, each element in the input data schema is separated by thecolumn separator in the output text string. If more than one character is specified inthis field, the Render Data activity places the entire string specified in this fieldbetween each column. For example, if ":;" is specified in this field, then ":;" displaysbetween each column in the rendered string.

When parsing text, each column becomes an element in the output data schema. Ifmore than one character is specified in this field, the Parse Data activity uses therules specified in the Col Separator Parse Rule field to determine how to parse thedata.

235


Field Description

Col SeparatorParse Rule

Specifies the rule to use for multiple column separator characters when parsingdata. The choices are the following:

● Treat all characters entered as a single column separator string.

The characters entered into the Col Separator field are treated as a single stringthat acts as a separator. For example, if the specified Col Separator is ":;" thenApple:;Orange:;Pear is treated as three columns.

● Treat each character specified as a potential column separator

Any of the characters will act as a column separator. For example, if thespecified Col Separator is ":;" Apple;Orange:Pear is treated as three columns.

LineSeparator

Specifies the character(s) that determine the end of each line. Available LineSeparator characters are:

● New Line● Carriage Return● Carriage Return/Line Feed(windows)

When parsing text each line is treated as a new record in the output data schema.When rendering text, each data record is separated by the line separator characterin the output text string.

The last line in your input file must be terminated by the specified line separator.

Fill Character When processing fixed format columns, this is the type of character that is used tofill the empty space in a column and between columns. This field is only availablewhen you select the Fixed format option in the Format Type field. The fill characteris used only by the Render Data activity.

You can select any one from the following available options:

● Space: fills with a space● Dash: fills with a dash● Others: specify your own custom fill character in the Fill With field

For example, you have a column that holds an integer and the specified width is 10.One row has the value "588" for that column. Because the width of 588 is three andthe column width is 10, the remaining 7 characters are filled with the specified fillcharacter.

Data Format Editor

You can define a custom schema for the text in the Data Format Editor. You can define your owndatatype here. After defining the data type, the data specified here is used to parse a text string into thespecified schema or render the specified schema as a text string. The Header element contains thefollowing:

● @attribute● (any element)● primitive● (any element)

236


Field Offsets

When processing fixed format text, you must specify the line length and the column offsets. Thisenables the Parse Data or Render Data activity to determine where columns and lines begin and end.You can specify the format of fixed-width text using the Field Offsets.

The line length is the total length of input lines, including the line separator characters. Include theappropriate number of characters for the selected line separator in the Data Format Configuration tothe total length of each line.

The column offset is the starting and ending character position on each line for the column. Each linestarts at 0 (zero). For each column of the line, you must specify the name of the data item associatedwith this column(this is the same name you specified for the corresponding elements in the dataschema), the starting offset for the column, and the ending offset for the column.

Each column offset can begin where the last column offset ended. Many fixed format data files are usedby databases or are generated by automated processes. These files have rigid file record formats andmay not have additional padding space between the columns. When you define each column offset tobegin where the last column offset ends, you can read the data more quickly by TIBCO ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks. This is because you can read sequentially the bytes of the input reords.

Consider the following text file. The first two lines of the file indicate offset numbers (each 0 indicatesanother 10 characters), and the fill character between columns is spaces:0 12 30 450123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567857643 Smith Chris Account57644 Jones Pat Marketing57645 Walker Terry Development

Delimeter Separated Fields

When processing delimiter-separated text, each field in the input line is separated by the delimiterspecified by the Column Separator field. Leading and trailing spaces are stripped from each field andthe specified Line Separator determines when a new record starts.

In some situations, you may not be able to choose a column separator character that does not display inany column data. For example, if you choose a comma as the column separator, there may be commasin some of the column values. To process data that contains column separator characters in a column,you can surround the column with double quotes (" "). You can also use double quote to includeleading and trailing spaces as well as line breaks in a field. If you want to display a double quote in afield, escape the double quote by using two consecutive double quotes. That is, use "" to represent adouble quote in a field.

The following data illustrates input lines with each field separated by commas. some fields, however,contain commas, leading or trailing spaces, double quotes, and line breaks.

57643, Smith, "Chris", Accounting , "State: Be prepared!"

57644, Jones, "Pat ", Marketing , "Statement: To paraphrase JFK, ""Ask not what your

company can do for you, ask what you can do for your company.""

57645, Walker, "Terry", Development, "Statement: May goal si to be CEO someday."

Notice that Pat Jones' statement spans two lines and contains double quotes as well as a comma. Theentire field is surrounded by double quotes, so it is still treated as part of the same record.

237


FTL Realm Server ConnectionThe FTL Realm Server Connection shared resource describes the connection parameters for connectingto a Realm server and creation of the Realm object to be used by the FTL palette activities. Use thisshared resource when configuring activities in the FTL palette.

General


Field Description

Package The name to be displayed as the label of the resource package.


Description A short description of the resource.

FTL Realm Server Connection Configuration


Field


FTL Realm Server URL Yes The URL of the FTL realm server.

FTL Secondary RealmServer URL

Yes The URL of the backup FTL realm server.

FTL Application Name Yes The name of the FTL application, which includes a set ofendpoints and formats as configured in the realm server.

The Browse button can be used to browse the FTLapplications defined on the Realm server.

FTL ApplicationInstance ID

Yes The ID of the FTL application instance.

Username Yes The username of the FTL realm server.

Password Yes The password of the FTL realm server.

Test Connection

When you click the Test Connection button, ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks connects to the remote FTLRealm server on the specified port using the specified username and password. You can use this buttonto determine whether the specified connection configuration is correct.

238


FTP ConnectionFTP Connection shared resource describes a connection to an FTP server. Use the FTP connectionswhen configuring activities in the FTP palette.

General


Field Description


Description A short description of the activity.

FTP Connection


Field


Host Yes The host name or IP address of the FTP server.

Port Yes The port number of the FTP server. For connections inside of afirewall, 21 is the default when no value is specified in thisfield.

User Name Yes The user name to use when logging into the FTP server.

Password Yes The password to use when logging into the FTP server.

Mode Yes Specify whether you want to use Active or Passive mode toconnect to the FTP server.

239


Field


ConnectionTimeout (msec)

Yes The timeout specified in this field (in milliseconds) applies tothe following scenarios:

● Making the control socket connection to the FTP Server● Making the data socket connection to the FTP server

(passive mode)● Waiting for the data socket connection from the FTP server

(active mode)● Reading a reply from control socket after sending a FTP

control command● Reading data from the data sockets

The default is 60000 milliseconds.

If the specified time is reached when attempting any of theseoperations, the activity using this FTP connection terminateswithout error and takes any matching success transitions to thenext activity in the process.

Remote FilenameEncoding

None A drop-down list of values for specifying the characterencoding of file names supplied to FTP commands using thisconnection.

The encoding specified in this field is used when sending pathand file names supplied to FTP commands that use this FTPConnection resource. Set this field when the FTP server has adifferent system encoding than the machine where the engineis running.

Firewall Yes Specifies whether the FTP host resides outside of a firewall.Selecting this checkbox enables the Proxy Host, Proxy Port,and Proxy User Name fields. If this check box is selected, youmust supply the Proxy Host and Proxy Port fields with thename and the port of the proxy server used to access sitesoutside of a firewall. You can optionally specify the user nameand password for the proxy server, if required.

Proxy Host Yes Specifies the host name or IP address of the firewall server.This is used when the remote FTP server is outside of afirewall.

Proxy Port Yes Specifies the port number of the firewall server. This is usedwhen the remote FTP server is outside of a firewall.

Proxy User Name Yes Specifies the user name to use to connect to the proxy server, ifnecessary. This is used when the remote FTP server is outsideof a firewall.

240


Field


Proxy Password Yes Specifies the password to use for the specified user name whenconnecting to the proxy server, if necessary. This is used whenthe remote FTP server is outside of a firewall.

Test Connection

When you click the Test Connection button, ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks attempts to connect to thespecified remote FTP server on the specified port using the specified username and password. You canuse this button to determine whether the specified connection configuration is correct.

Available Commands

The Available Commands button displays a dialog with details about which FTP commands areavailable on the specified remote server. FTP servers on different operating systems and from differentvendors support slightly different commands. Use this button to determine the available commands onthe remote FTP server before attempting to execute them with the FTP Quote activity.

Security

Select the Confidentiality check box to display the SSL Client field.

Field Description

SSL Client The name of the resource.

In the SslClientResource Resource Template wizard, create a resource toconnect to the SSL client.

HTTP ClientThe HTTP Client resource template represents an outgoing HTTP connection.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the resource

Description A short description of the shared resource

HTTP Client


241


Field


ImplementationLibrary

No Specifies the implementation library to be used:

● Apache Commons(Supported by HTTP and SOAP): mustbe used for SOAP binding.

● Apache HttpComponents(Supported by HTTP and REST):must be used for REST binding, when the Invoke REST APIactivity needs to be used.

The default is Apache Commons(Supported by HTTP andSOAP).

The HTTP palette activities work with both ApacheCommons and Apache HttpComponents.

DisableConnectionPooling

Yes Indicates whether to use the single or multi-threadedconnection manager.

The default value is False.

Maximum TotalConnections

Yes Controls the maximum number of simultaneous activeconnection that this resource instance allows. Increase the valuefor the application that creates many long-lived connections.

The default value is 200.

Idle ConnectionTimeout(ms)

Yes Keep-alive time (in milliseconds) for idle HTTP connection inthe Persistent Connection Pool.

Maximum TotalConnections PerHost/Route

Yes Controls the maximum number of simultaneous activeconnections to a same host or on same route that this resourceinstance permits.

This number cannot be greater than Maximum TotalConnections.


Stale Check Yes Selecting this check box determines whether the staleconnection check is to be used. Disabling the stale connectioncheck can result in slight performance improvement at the riskof getting an I/O error, when executing a request over aconnection that has been closed at the server side.

Default Host Yes The name of the host that accepts the incoming requests.

For machines that have only one network card, the defaultvalue localhost specifies the current machine. For machineswith more than one network card, this field specifies the hostname of the card used to accept the incoming HTTP requests.

The default is localhost.

242


Field


Default Port Yes The port number on which to invoke outgoing HTTP requests.

The default is 80.

Thread Pool No Specifies a queue of threads available to run a queue of tasks.

Thread pools are used to improve performance when executinglarge numbers of asynchronous tasks by reducing per taskinvocation overhead, provide a means of bounding, andmanaging the resources consumed when executing a collectionof tasks.

Advanced


Field


Accept Redirect Yes Indicates whether the HTTP method should automaticallyfollow HTTP redirects.

This option is used when client connection receives the redirectresponses from server like Moved Permanently, MovedTemporarily, Temporary Redirect and so on.


Retry Count Yes Specifies the maximum number of retry attempts for connectingto the server if an exception occurs.


Use SingleCookie Header

Yes Indicates that multiple name/value pairs must be sent in a singlenon-repeating Cookie header element for outgoing HTTPrequests.


HTTP Proxy No Specifies the HTTP proxy server to be used to gain accessoutside of a firewall. The Proxy Configuration sharedconfiguration resource specifies the configuration of the proxyserver. See Proxy Configuration for more information.

Security

Security can include any combination of the following characteristics:

243


Field Description

Authentication To be included when the messages must be authenticated. Authenticationcan be performed with user names and passwords.

Identity Provider : Provides username and password credentialsencapsulated in an identity provider resource. Select this check box activatesthe Identity Provider field.

Confidentiality To be included when encrypting or decrypting messages.

Selecting this check box displays the SSL Client Configuration field. Fordetails, refer to SSL Client Configuration.

Persistent ConnectionsPersistent connections maintain a pool of connections that can be reused by Send HTTP Requestactivities to avoid opening and closing the connection. Persistent Connection Manager is created byHTTP Client shared resource. Hence, each HTTP Client shared resource has its own persistentconnection pool.

A Send HTTP Request activity requires a connection to the HTTP server. The activity exclusively usesthe connection until the HTTP server sends the response message. If you have many process instancesconnecting to a HTTP server, each Send HTTP Request activity opens a connection, holds theconnection until the activity completes, and then closes the connection. Opening and closing a largenumber of connections causes a significant overhead. Persistent connections play a significant role insuch scenarios.

Not all HTTP servers support the use of persistent connections. To determine whether the HTTP serversupports the use of persistent connections, read the documentation of that HTTP server.

Using persistent connection manager you can specify the total number of connections and themaximum number of connections per HTTP server. The total number of connections signify theaggregate connections to all HTTP servers handled by that connection pool.

HTTP ConnectorHTTP Connector resource describes the characteristics of the connection used to receive incomingHTTP requests. This resource is used when TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks requires an HTTPrequest on a specific port where the HTTP server is running. For example, the process starter HTTPReceiver and the signal-in Wait for HTTP Request activity receiving HTTP requests.

There can be only one process with an HTTP Receiver or Wait for HTTP Request activity that uses thesame HTTP Connection resource. With this restriction the HTTP server listening for the incomingrequests dispatches the request to the correct process.

General


Field


Package None The name to be displayed as the label of the resource package.

Name None The name to be displayed as the label for the resource.

244


Field


Description None A short description of the activity.

Basic Configuration

The Basic Configuration section has the following fields.

Field


Host Yes Specifies the name of the host that accepts the incoming requests.For machines that have only one network card, the default valuelocalhost specifies the current machine. For machines that havemore than one network card, this field specifies the host name ofthe card that will be used to accept incoming HTTP requests.

If there is more than one network card on the machine, and youspecify localhost in this field, all network cards on the machinelisten for incoming HTTP requests on the specified port.

You can start more than one HTTP server on a singleport by using Context and Path fields on HTTPReceiver and Wait for HTTP activities. Ensure thatyou use a different port, if different Context or Pathare not specified.

Port Yes The port number on which to listen for incoming HTTP requests.

Accept QueueSize

Yes The number of connection requests to be queued before theoperating system starts sending rejections. The default valuesare: -1 and 0.

These default values signify that the queue size is 50 or OS-specific.

AcceptorThreads

Yes The number of acceptor threads specified to accept the incomingconnections.

Advanced Configuration

The Advanced Configuration section has the following fields.

Field


Header Buffer Size(B)

Yes Specify to set the size of the buffer for request headers. An idleconnection at most has one buffer of this size allocated. Thedefault is 4K.

245


Field


Use Non-BlockingIO Sockets

Yes Select this check box to use non-blocking threading model forNIO buffers.

Use this connector when there are many connections with idleperiods. The default is true.

Request BufferSize (B)

Yes Specify to set the size of the content buffer for receivingrequests. These buffers are used only for active connectionsthat have requests with bodies that do not fit within the headerbuffer. The default is 8K.

Use Direct Buffers Yes Specify to determine whether direct byte buffers are used ornot. The default is True.

Response BufferSize (B)

Yes Specify to set the size of the content buffer for sendingresponses. These buffers are used only for active connectionsthat are sending responses with bodies that will not fit withinthe header buffer. The default is 24K.

URI Encoding Yes Specifies the character encoding used to decode the URI bytes.

If you do not set any value for uriEncoding, the default UTF-8is used.

Max Idle Time(ms)

Yes Specify to set the maximum idle time for a connection. TheMax Idle Time is applied when:

● waiting for a new request to be received on a connection;when reading the headers and content of a request

● writing the headers and content of a response

Jetty interprets this value as the maximum time between theprogress made on the connection. The timeout is reset ifimplemented by jetty if a single byte is read or written.

Enable DNSLookups

Yes Selecting this check box enables a domain name system (DNS)lookup for HTTP clients so that the IP address is resolved to aDNS name. This can adversely affect the throughput. Thischeck box is not selected as default. Select this check box onlywhen required.

The default is False.

Low Resource MaxIdle Time (ms)

Yes Specifies to set the period in ms for the connection to be idle.

This results in the server rapidly closing idle connections togracefully handle high load situations.

246


Field


Compression Yes Specifies if the output of the HTTP Connection is compressedusing the HTTP/1.1 GZIP compression.

The acceptable values for this field are: True or False

The default is False.

Linger Time (ms) Yes Specifes to set the LINGER_TIME on the connection socket.This setting affects only the close connection socket.

CompressibleMime Types

Yes Specifies the list of MIME types for which HTTP compressionmay be used. The default value for this comma separated lististext/html, text/xml, text/plain.

Max Post Size Yes Specifies the maximum size in bytes of the POST that thecontainer FORM URL parameter parsing can handle.

By default, the value of this field is set to 2M or 2097152bytes. Setting the value less than or equal to zero disables thelimit for maxPostSize.

Reverse ProxyHost

Yes Specifies the name of the reverse proxy host that accepts theincoming requests.

Max Save Post Size Yes Specifies the maximum size in bytes of the POST that thecontainer can save/buffer during FORM or CLIENT-CERTauthentication.

● FORM authentication: the request message is saved whilethe user is redirected to the login page. It is retained untilthe user authentication succeeds or the session associatedwith the authentication request expires.

● CLIENT-CERT authentication: the request message isbuffered for the entire duration of the SSL handshake. Afterprocessing the request, the buffer is emptied.

However, in both the cases the buffering happens before theuser authentication. By default, the value of this field is set to4K or 4096 bytes. Setting the value to -1 disables the limit forthis field.

Reverse Proxy Port Yes The reverse proxy port number on which to listen for theincoming HTTP requests.

Minimum QTPThreads

Yes Specifies the minimum number of threads available for theincoming HTTP requests. The HTTP server creates the numberof threads specified by this parameter when it starts up. Thedefault value of this property is 10.

247


Field


Maximum QTPThreads

Yes Specifies the maximum number of threads available for theincoming HTTP requests. The HTTP server does not createmore than the number of threads specified by this parameter.The default value of this property is 75.

Security

Security can include any combination of the following characteristics:

Field Description

Authentication To be included when the messages must be authenticated. Authenticationcan be performed with user names and passwords.

Identity Provider : Provide username and password credentialsencapsulated in an identity provider resource. Selected this check box toactivate the Identity Provider field.

Confidentiality To be included when encrypting or decrypting the messages.

Selecting this check box displays the SSL Server Configuration field. Usethis field to specify the SSL parameters for the HTTP Connector sharedresource. For details, refer to SSL Server Configuration.

Identity ProviderIdentity Provider shared resource provides access to a username and password credential stored in akeystore.

General


Field Description

Name The name of a Keystore Provider resource that maintains a keystore used toassert an identity


Identity Provider


Field Description

Username The username to access the identity

Password The password to access the identity

248


JDBC ConnectionJDBC Connection resource describes a JDBC connection. JDBC connections are used when specifyingactivities from the JDBC palette.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the shared resource


JDBC Connection


Field


Connection Type None Specifies the kind of JDBC connection you want to create.

MaximumConnections

None The maximum number of database connections to allocate.The default maximum is 10. The minimum value that can bespecified is 1.

Login Credentials Yes The user name used to connect to the database.

The password used to connect to the database.

JDBC Drivers


Field


Database Driver Yes The name of the JDBC driver class. You can select from a listof supported drivers.

If you select a supported driver, the Database URL field ispopulated with a template for the URL of the driver.

Database URL Yes The URL to use to connect to the database. A template of theURL is supplied for the selected JDBC driver. You mustsupply the portions of the URL that are in angle brackets (<>).

249


Field


Login Timeout Yes The length of time (in milliseconds) to wait for a successfuldatabase connection.

Only JDBC drivers that support connection timeouts can usethis field. If the JDBC driver does not support connectiontimeouts, the value of this field is ignored. Most JDBC driverssupport connection timeouts.

Test Connection

Click the Test Connection button to test whether the specified configuration fields result in a validconnection to a database.

Using Third Party JDBC Drivers

TIBCO Businessworks currently packages drivers for the following databases:

● PostgreSQL● Microsoft SQL Server

In addition, the JDBC palette also supports the Oracle and MySQL databases.

Adding Drivers for Runtime

If you want to use other databases, than the ones mentioned in Using Third Party JDBC Drivers, youmust add them for run time separately. This is a one time process for every installation of TIBCOActiveMatrix Businessworks.

To add the drivers at run time for Oracle or MySQL, run the bwinstall command from<BW_Home>/6.x/bin. Ensure that you run bwinstall with no arguments to access the help andinstructions to add the driver to the run time.

The script creates driver bundles and adds it to that specific Businessworks environment. AnyAppNodes that are created and started in that Businessworks environment include the driversautomatically.

Since the drivers are part of the system and not part of each application, all the applications on aparticular AppNode use the same drivers. However, this is not true of App Spaces. The drivers belongto an AppNode and not an AppSpace.

To use another location for the drivers, a preference is provided in TIBCO Business Studio which can beupdated for the JDBC palette to use drivers at design time. To change the Directory Preference, go toWindows > Preferences > BusinessWorks > Palettes > JDBC.

250


If you have changed the preferences and want to use other databases with the JDBC palette at designtime, place the drivers at the <BW_Home>/6.x/config/design/thirdparty location.

JMS ConnectionJMS Connection resource describes a JMS connection. This resource is used to specify activities on theJMS palette.

General


Field Description



Basic Configuration


Field Description

ConnectionFactory Type

A connection factory is the object used by a client to create a connection to aprovider. Select from one of the following available options:

● JNDI: select to look up the connection factory object. Selecting this optiondisplays the Queue Connection Factory and Topic Connection Factoryfields, when the Messaging Style selected is Queue/Topic.

● Direct: select if you want to connect to the JMS server using a URL.Selecting this option displays the Provider URL field and the Supports XATransactions check box. Ensure to select the Queue/Topic in the MessageStyle.

Messaging Style The available messaging style options are:

● Generic:● Queue/Topic:

You can combine these styles in a single application or the application can useany one of these messaging styles.

Queue ConnectionFactory

This field is available when you select JNDI in the Connection Factory Typefield and Queue/Topic in the Message Style field.

The QueueConnectionFactory object stored in JNDI is used to create a queueconnection with a JMS application.

See the JNDI provider documentation for more information about creatingand storing QueueConnectionFactory objects.

251


Field Description

Topic ConnectionFactory

This field is available only when you select JNDI in the Connection FactoryType field and Queue/Topic in the Message Style field.

The TopicConnectionFactory object stored in JNDI. This object is used tocreate a topic connection with a JMS application.

See the JNDI provider documentation for more information about creatingand storing TopicConnectionFactory objects.

ConnectionFactory JNDIName

This field is available only when you select the JNDI in the ConnectionFactory Type field and Generic in the Message Style field.

The GenericConnectionFactory object stored in JNDI is to create connectionwith JMS server.

JNDIConfiguration

A JNDI Configuration shared configuration object that specifies the JNDIconnection information. For details refer to, JNDI Configuration.

The New button is used to create a New JNDI Configuration SharedResource using the preferences set by the user.

Provider URL This field is available only when you select Direct in the Connection FactoryType field.

The URL to the JNDI service provider, for example,tcp://<host>:<port>.

Test Connection

Click the Test Connection button to test the connection specified in the configuration of this resource.

Security

Security section has the following field.

Field Description

Login Credentials The login credentials to log on to the JMS server. Click the Username+Password radio button, if you want to use this option for a secure login. Thisdisplays the Username and Password fields.

Advance Configuration


252


Field Description

Auto-generateClient-ID

Select this check box if you want to automatically generate the client ID if noclient ID is specified or if the specified ID is already in use.

When this check box is selected and a value is specified in the Client ID field,an attempt is made to use the specified value. However, if the specified valueis already in use, a new client ID is generated.

When an automatically generated client ID is required, the following format isused for the client ID:

BW-<projectName>-<topic or queue>-<engineName>-<timestamp>

Do not select this check box if you do not want to use the value specified in theClient ID field. If no value is specified in the Client ID field, no client ID isset. If the value specified in the Client ID field is already in use, it throws anexception.

Client ID The client ID for the connection. The JMS providers have a provider-specificformat for client IDs.

See the JMS provider’s documentation for more information about client IDs.Each connection must use a unique client ID. If you do not specify a value inthis field, TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks ensures the uniqueness of theclient ID for each connection.

SSL

Select the Confidentiality check box to configure the SSL connection parameters.

JMS Preference Page

A preference page is provided for the JMS Connection in TIBCO Business Studio. To change theDirectory Preference in TIBCO Business Studio, navigate to Windows > Preferences > BusinessWorks> Palettes > JMS

Field Description

One click JNDI Resourcename

The name of JNDI Connection shared resource which is auto createdwhen you click the New button. This is used only if the shared resourceuses JNDI and not Direct.

253


Field Description

Default JNDI NamingURL

The default URL to be added in the JNDI Connection shared resourcewhen a new resource is created.

Generic ConnectionFactory Name

The value to be added in the Generic Connection Factory field when anew JMS Connection Shared Resource is created.

Queue ConnectionFactory Name

The value to be added in the Queue Connection Factory field when anew JMS Connection shared resource is created.

Topic ConnectionFactory Name

The value to be added in the Topic Connection Factory field when anew JMS Connection shared resource is created.

JNDI ConfigurationJNDI Configuration shared resource provides a way to configure the JNDI configuration that can beshared with other activities. This resource can be specified in any resource that permits JNDIconnections. For example, JDBC Connection and JMS Connection can use JNDI connections.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the shared resource


JNDI Connection


Field


JNDI Provider No The name of the JNDI connection.

Initial ContextFactory

Yes The initial context factory class for accessing JNDI.(com.tibco.tibjms.naming.TibjmsInitialContextFactory).

Naming ProvidingURL

Yes The name of the JNDI provider URL. For example,tibjmsnaming://localhost:7222.

Security

This section has the following field.

254


Field Description

Login Credentials The login details to access the JNDI connection. Select any one of thefollowing options.

● None: Selecting this radio button will not display the Username+Password option.

● Username+Password: Valid username and password to access the JNDIconnection.

Java Global InstanceYou can use Java Global Instance shared configuration resource to specify a Java object to be sharedacross all process instances in a Java Virtual Machine (JVM).

When the engine is started, an instance of the specified Java class is constructed. When the processengine is shut down, if specified, a cleanup method is invoked on the object. The object is releasedbefore the engine shuts down. Any Java Invoke activity can be configured to access the shared Javaglobal instance when the process engine runs. Any Java Invoke activity can access the shared javaglobal instance by invoking the static methods of the configured Java class.

If multiple process instances access the shared Java global instance, you may want to ensure that onlyone process instance can access the object at a time. You can accomplish this by either declaring themethods of the configured class as synchronous or by using a critical section group.

General

The General field has the following fields.

Field Description


Description A short description of the resource

Java Global Instance

The section has the following fields.

Field Description

Class Use the Browse a Class button to locate the class you want to use.

Method Select a constructor from the drop-down list of constructors available for thisclass. This is used to construct the class when the engine is started.

This field displays only the default constructor with no parameters orconstructors that have only parameters of Java primitive types. You cannotcreate an object using a constructor that requires an object, array, or non-primitive type for a parameter.

255


Field Description

Parameter Input The input parameters for the constructor selected in the Method field. Eachinput parameter has the following three fields:

● Parameter: the name of the parameter● Type: the datatype of the parameter● Value: specify a value for the parameter in this field

When string is the datatype for the parameter, do not use quotesaround the string when specifying the value.



Field Description

Invoke CleanupMethod

Selecting this check box signifies that you want to invoke a method on theobject before the object is released from memory when the engineterminates. You can perform cleanup activities, such as closing connections,releasing resources, and so on.

Selecting this check box enables the Cleanup Method field.

Cleanup Method This field is only available when you select the Invoke Cleanup Methodcheck box.

You can specify the name of the method to invoke before the object inmemory is released. The method selected cannot contain any parameters,therefore only methods without parameters are listed in this field. Anyvalues returned by the selected method are ignored, but exceptions raisedby the selected method are sent to the log.

Keystore ProviderKeystore Provider shared resource provides an access to a keystore.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the keystore provider resource.


Keystore


256


Field


Provider None The name of the keystore provider. Select from the followingavailable options:

● SUN● IBMJCE

Default: Empty. The first matching provider supporting theformat is selected.

URL Yes The location of the external keystore.

Password Yes The password for the keystore.

Type None The type of the keystore: JCEKS, JKS, PKCS#12.

Default: JKS

Refresh Interval Yes Refresh interval, greater than 0. If the keystore provider isaccessed after the refresh interval has expired:

● The refresh timer is reset to zero.● The operations on the keystore provider are performed on

the refreshed copy.


LDAP AuthenticationAn LDAP Authentication shared resource represents configuring the connection to an LDAP server.This connection is used by component implementations to look up names in an LDAP directory server.

LDAP authentication is primarily used for HTTP basic authentication in TIBCO ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks 6.x and the fields largely used are:

● Server URL: LDAP Server Location, such as, ldap://10.107.170.145:389

● User Search Expression: search expression for the user, such as (&(cn={0])(objectclass=user))

● User DN Template: user distinguished name template, such ascn={0},cn=users,dc=na,DC=tibco,DC=com

General


Field Description

Package The name to be displayed as the label of the shared resource package.

Name The name of the LDAP authentication resource.

Description A short description of the shared resource.

257


LDAP Authentication

The LDAP authentication comprises Connection, Users and Groups, Search, Advanced, and TestConfiguration.

Connection

The Connection tab has the following fields.

Field

Literal Value/ModuleProperty/ Description

Server URL Yes The URL with the host and port number on which the LDAPserver is listening for connections.

The default is ldap://localhost:389

User SearchExpression

Yes The length of time to search for connection on the LDAPdirectory server.

The default is 0.

Admin UserCredential

None The username and password in LDAP format such ascn={0},CN=Users,DC=ce,DC=na,DC=tibco,DC=com. Create alimited or restricted user that can only search your tree.

Selecting this check box displays the Credentials Provideroption.

CredentialProvider

None The name of the credential provider. In the UserIdResourceResource Template wizard, create a resource to connect to theSSL client.

User SearchBase DN

Yes The LDAP user search expression to be used for performing theuser search. Leave this field blank to start search from the toplevel element in the directory.

The search expression used is (&(cn={0})(objectclass=user)).

User SearchScope

None This specifies the number of levels in the directory server that issearched for a matching user profile. Select any from thefollowing available options:

● Subtree: indicates all the sub-entries (all lower levels)● One level: indicates all entries immediately (one level)

The default is Subtree.

SSLConfiguration

None Select this check box to configure an SSL Client.

SSL Client None The name of the resource. In the SslClientResource ResourceTemplate wizard, create a resource to connect to the LDAPserver over SSL using SSL client shared resource.

258


Users and Groups

The Users and Groups tab has the following fields.

Field

LiteralValue/ModuleProperty/ Description

User's name Yes The name of the user in the LDAP directory.

Additional userattributes toretrieve

Yes The field specifies the LDAP attribute used to search and retrieve theuser profile. For example, using a different attribute in your directoryserver such as the given name.

GroupIndication

None Specifies the following groups:

● No Group Info● User Attributes Indicates Group: used for grouping the user that

matches the specified attribute. When selected, displays the UserAttribute Group Name field.

● User DN Indicates Group: group of user DN. When selected,displays the User Attribute Group Name field.

● Search Groups:

Selecting the Search Groups option displays the following groups:

● Group Root DN● Group Search Expression● Group Attribute User Names● Group Attribute Group Name● Group Attribute Subgroup Name

Search

The Search tab has the following fields.

259


Field


User SearchScope

None This specifies the number of levels in the directory server that issearched for a matching user profile. Select any from the followingavailable options:

● Subtree: indicates all the sub-entries (all lower levels)● One level: indicates all entries immediately (one level)

The default is Subtree.

Group RootDN

Yes The root distinguished name (DN) group name.

Group SearchScope

None Provides the search scope option, true or false.

● Select true, if you want to scan the entire LDAP tree beneath theDN (subtree scope).

● Select false, if you want to scan only direct children of that DN(one-level scope).

Group SearchExpression

Yes The group search expression property

Advanced


Field


FollowReferrals

None When you select this check box, the LDAP server does not returnresults. Instead it returns a reference (a referral) to another LDAPserver which may contain additional information such as the namesand locations of other objects.

ConnectionPool

Yes Specify the number of the connections in this field. The default is 10.

All activities that are part of the same transaction, use the sameconnection in the connection pool. The first activity in a transactionattempts to reestablish an invalid connection. If a connection becomesinvalid during a transaction, the transaction is rolled back and must beretried, if necessary.

SearchTimeout(milliseconds)

Yes Specifies the timeout for LDAP search. The default is -1.

Click the Test button to start testing the LDAP search operation.

260


Test Configuration

The Test Configuration tab has the following fields.

Field Description

Search Results Shows the search results returned by the LDAP search operation.

Proxy ConfigurationProxy Configuration shared resource is used to specify a proxy HTTP server when HTTP requests aresent outside of a firewall.

General


Field Description



Proxy Connection Configuration


Field


Host Yes The host name or IP address of the proxy server.

Port Yes The port number of the proxy host.

Security


Field Description

Authentication Select the check box to specify the authentication to be used.

Identity Provider Create a UserId resource in the UserIdResource Resource Template wizard.This provides access to the username and password credentials to access theproxy connection.

261


Rendezvous TransportRendezvous Transport shared resource describes a TIBCO Rendezvous transport. This resource is usedto specify activities from the Rendezvous palette.

General


Field Description



Rendezvous Transport Configuration


Field


Daemon Yes If Rendezvous is running on a different machine, the Daemonfield is specified as the remote host name followed by thesocket number.

For example: ssl:acct:5785

If TIBCO Rendezvous daemon is running on the samemachine where BusinessWorks engine is also running, do notspecify this field.

Network Yes This field contains the host name, IP address, network name,or interface name. For example, ;224.34.103.4.

Service Yes TIBCO Rendezvous service name in one of the followingformats: <service name>

or <port number>

Security


Field Description

Confidentiality Select the Confidentiality check box to display the SSL Client field.

SSL Client The name of the resource. In the SslClientResource Resource Templatewizard, create a resource to connect to the SSL client.

Authentication Select the Authentication check box to display the Identity Provider field.

262


Field Description

Identity Provider Create a UserId resource in the UserIdResource Resource Template wizard.This provides access to the username and password credentials to access theproxy connection.


Here you can specify the RV type.

Field Description

RV Type The type of TIBCO Rendezvous connection to use.

● Reliable: standard RV transport● Certified: RVCM● Distributed Queue: RVCMQ

SMTP ResourceAn SMTP shared resource template represents a connection to an SMTP server. Using the SMTPResource, you can transfer e-mail messages between servers. The SMTP communications aretransported by TCP to ensure end-to-end transport.

General


Field Description



SMTP


Field


Machine Name Yes The name of the host that accepts the incoming requests. Thedefault value is localhost.

Port Yes The port number on which you can listen for SMTP requests.The default value is 25.

Timeout (ms) Yes The waiting time for a response from the server. The timeoutmust be greater than 0. A timeout of zero is interpreted as aninfinite timeout.

263


Field


Username Yes The valid username used to authenticate connections to theserver.

Password Yes The valid password used to authenticate connections to theserver.

EnableSTARTTLS

ModuleProperty

Some mail servers (such as Microsoft Exchange 2010 ) supportSMTP over SSL using the STARTTLS feature. ActiveMatrixBusinessWorks supports this using the Enable STARTTLScheck box which is set to default as true.

Security

Select the Confidentiality check box to display the SSL Client field.

Field Description

SSL Client The name of the resource. In the SslClientResource Resource Templatewizard, create a resource to connect to the SSL client.

SSL Server ConfigurationYou can specify SSL parameters for the HTTP connection here.

The following are the fields in the SSL Server Configuration for the HTTP connector.

General


Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label for the SSL server configurationshared resource.

Description A short description of the SSL server configuration shared resource.

Basic SSL Server Configuration

This contains the following fields.

Field


Identity StoreProvider

None Used to provide identity store.

Key Alias Name Yes The name of the alias used to access the identity.

264


Field


Key Alias Password Yes The password for the alias.

Enable MutualAuthentication

None Indicates whether the client in the SSL connectionauthenticates to the server. Selecting this check box displaysthe identity fields.

Client Auth Type None Select the type of client authentication from the drop-downlist. The available types are:

● none● optional● required

Keystore Provideras Trustore

None The name of a keystore provider resource instance thatmaintains a keystore that confirms an identity.

Advanced SSL Server Configuration

Use the following fields for advanced SSL server configuration.

Field


SSL SecurityProvider

None Optional. The SSL security provider.

SSL Protocol Yes The SSL protocol to use in the SSL connection. Select fromthe following options:

● SSLv3● TLSv1

Default: TLSv1

SSL Cipher Class Yes The number of bits in the key used to encrypt data:

● No Exportable Ciphers● All Ciphers● At Least 128 Bit● More Than 128 Bit● At Least 256 Bit● FIPS Ciphers● Explicit Ciphers

265


Field


Explicit Cipher List None A list of ciphers. Enabled when SSL Cipher Class is set toExplicit Ciphers. Use the JSSE format for ciphers names.

Verify Remote HostName

None Indicates whether the name on the server's certificate mustbe verified against the server's hostname.

If the server's hostname is different than the name on thecertificate, the SSL connection fails. You can verify the nameon the certificate against another name by specifyingExpected Remote Hostname.

Selecting this check box displays the Expected RemoteHostname field.

Default: This check box is clear.

Expected RemoteHostname

None Optional. The expected name of the remote host.

The default is None.

SSL Client ConfigurationYou can specify SSL parameters for the HTTP client shared resource here.

SSL Client Configuration

The General section in the SSL Client Configuration has the following fields.

Field Description

Name The name to be displayed as the label of the SSL Client resource.

Description A short description of the SSL client resource.

Basic SSL Client Configuration


Field Description

Keystore ProviderAs Trust Store

The name of a keystore provider resource instance that maintains a keystorethat confirms an identity.

Enable MutualAuthentication

Indicates whether the client in the SSL connection authenticates to theserver. Select this check box to enable the identity fields.

Identity StoreProvider

The name of keystore provider resource that maintains a keystore used toassert an identity.

Key Alias Name The name of the alias used to access the identity.

266


Field Description

Key Alias Password The password for the alias.

Advanced Client SSL Configuration

This section contains the following fields.

Field Description

SSL SecurityProvider

Optional. The SSL security provider.

SSL Protocol The SSL protocol to use in the SSL connection:

● SSLv3● TLSv1

The default is TLSv1.

SSL Cipher Class The number of bits in the key used to encrypt data:

● No Exportable Ciphers● All Ciphers● At Least 128 Bit● More Than 128 Bit● At Least 256 Bit● FIPS Ciphers● Explicit Ciphers

The greater the number of bits in the key (cipher strength), the more possiblekey combinations and the longer it takes to break the encryption.

The default is At Least 128 Bit.

Explicit Cipher List A list of ciphers. Enabled when SSL Cipher Class is set to Explicit Ciphers.Use the JSSE format for ciphers names.

Verify Remote Hostname

Indicates whether the name on the server's certificate must be verifiedagainst the server's hostname. If the server's hostname is different than thename on the certificate, the SSL connection fails. The name on the certificatecan be verified against another name by specifying Expected RemoteHostname.

Selecting this check box displays the Expected Remote Hostname field.

Default: This check box is clear.

Expected RemoteHostname

Optional. The expected name of the remote host.

The default is None.

267


TCP ConnectionThe TCP Connection shared resource specifies the connection information for the TCP server. Thisresource is used when a process acts as a TCP client connecting to a remote server or when a processacts as a TCP server accepting incoming TCP.

General


Field Description



TCPConnection


Field


Host Yes When a process acts as a client, this field specifies the hostname or host IP address of the TCP server to connect to.

When a process acts as a server, this field specifies thehostname or IP address of the machine where the processengine is running. You can specify "localhost" or if the machinehas more than one network interface card, you can specify theIP address of the card you want to use to accept the TCP/IPconnections.

Port Yes This field specifies the port number on which a TCP server islistening for requests.

EnableConnection Pool

Yes Selecting this check box enables the When ExhaustedConnections, Maximum Connections, Maximum Wait Time,and Idle Timeout fields.

268


Field


When ExhaustedConnections

Yes When the connections are exhausted on the server, selectanyone from the following available options.

● Block: the pool is blocked when the pool is exhausted (thatis, the maximum number of active objects has been reached)until a connection is available, or the maximum wait timehas been reached.

● Fail: when the pool is exhausted (that is, the maximumnumber of connections have been consumed), it fails.

● Grow: when this policy is selected a new connection iscreated for every request of the client, therefore there is nomaximum connection limit.

MaximumConnections

Yes Maximum number of simultaneous client sessions that canconnect with the server. The default is 10.

Maximum WaitTime (msec)

Yes The maximum wait time in milliseconds to connect to the TCPserver.

Idle Timeout(msec)

Yes Specify the idle timeout for the connections in milliseconds. Thedefault is -1.

Thread PoolThis is a queue of threads available to run a collection of tasks. Thread pools are used to improveperformance when executing large numbers of asynchronous tasks by reducing per task invocationoverhead. This provides a means of bounding and managing the resources consumed when executing acollection of tasks.

General


Field Description



Thread Pool


269


Field


Core Pool Size Yes Must be greater than or equal to zero. The default is 5.

Max Pool Size Yes The maximum number of threads in the pool. Must be greaterthan zero and greater than or equal to core pool size.

The default is 10.

Keep AliveTime (s)

Yes The length of time an idle thread remains in the pool before beingreclaimed, if the number of threads in pool is more than core poolsize.

The default is 30 seconds.

Autostart CoreThreads

Yes Indicates to create and start the core pool size threads when thethread pool is created. Normally core threads are created andstarted only when new tasks arrive.

Thread PoolName Prefix

Yes A string prefixed to the name of each thread.

Daemon Yes Select the check box to specify whether the threads can be startedas a daemon or a user. The default is false.

Priority Yes The default priority of the threads in the pool. The default is 5.

Rejection Policy No The policy applied when no thread is available to run a task:

● BLOCKING: the task is blocked until a thread from the threadpool picks up this task.

● CALLER RUNS: the task is run in the calling thread.● ABORT: the task is aborted and an exception is thrown.

The default is BLOCKING.

270


TCP Palette

The TCP palette provides activities and resources that can send and receive data using the TCPprotocol. TCP is often the inherent communication layer for high-level protocols such as HTTP or FTP.

You could use the resources in the TCP palette to communicate with HTTP or FTP severs, but theactivities in the HTTP palette or FTP palette are best suited for this purpose. Use this palette whencommunicating with TCP, when there is no corresponding TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks palettefor the protocol. For example, using the TCP palette to handle the incoming and outgoing data from acustom application that communicates with other applications by way of TCP.

Using the TCP Palette ActivitiesYou can use the TCP palette activities to create a general sequence of events in a process.

Procedure

1. Create a TCP Connection shared configuration resource that describes the connection information.

2. Depending on whether the process is a TCP client or server, one of the following occurs:a) A connection opens using the TCP Open Connection activity, when a process works as a TCP

client communicating with a TCP server.b) The process starts either with a TCP Receiver process starter or has a Wait for TCP Request

activity that waits for an incoming connection request, when a process works as a TCP serverwaiting for the incoming TCP requests.

3. Use the Read TCP Data and Write TCP Data activities to read and write data to the in process TCPconnection.

4. After the process is complete, close the TCP connection using the TCP Close Connection activity.

Read TCP DataRead TCP Data is an asynchronous activity that reads data from an open TCP connection. Theconnection must be opened by an activity or a process starter that executed previously in the process.

Activities that can open a TCP connection are: TCP Receiver, TCP Open Connection, and Wait forTCP Request. The activity that opens a TCP connection places a handle to the open connection in itsconnectionKey output element. The connectionKey is mapped to this activity’s input.

General


Field



271


Field


Type None Type of data to be read. This can be either Text or Binary.

Specifying Text in this field enables the Separator and Encodingfields. When Binary is specified, the Bytes To Read field isenabled.

Separator Yes The type of separator. This activity reads data from the TCPconnection until the separator or the end of the data stream isencountered.

Select User-defined binary separator (specify comma-separatedbyte values) from the drop-down list to enable the User DefinedSeparator field.

User DefinedSeparator

Yes This field specifies the separator character to use.

When Binary is selected in the Type field, a user-defined separatorcan be:

● A string representation of a single byte, or● A comma-separated byte values (for example, 0x0a, 0x0b, 0x0c,

and so on).

For valid string representations of byte values, refer to the Javadocumentation for the decode(String n) method of Java.lang.Byte.

Encoding Yes Specifying Text in the Type field, determines the characterencoding of the text data in this field.

Bytes To Read Yes Specify the number of bytes to be read by this activity.

This field is enabled when you select Binary in the Type field.

Leaving this field blank makes the activity read until the end of thedata stream is encountered.

Timeout(msec)

Yes The time to wait (in milliseconds) for this activity to complete.

Description


Input


When Text is specified in the Type field, the Input tab displays connection, encoding, separator, andtimeout elements. Specifying Binary in the Type field displays connection, bytesToRead, and timeoutelements.

272



connection binary The handle to the connection to read the data from.

This connection is obtained from a previously executed activity in theprocess that opened the connection.

encoding string Specifies the character encoding of the text when reading the text data.

This value overrides the value specified in the Encoding field in theGeneral tab.

separator string An optional element. Specifies the boundary between the bodyelements after writing the body element to the TCP connection, whilereading the text data.

This element is available only when the User Defined Separatoroption is selected on the General tab.

This value overrides the value specified in the General tab.

bytesToRead

number An optional element. Specifies the number of bytes to be read whenreading the binary data.

This value overrides the value specified in the Bytes To Read field inthe General tab.

timeout number An optional element. The time to wait (in milliseconds) for this activityto complete.

Output



data? string When the data is specified as text, this output element contains thetext read from the TCP connection. The separator character ifspecified, is not included in the output.

When the data is specified as binary, this output element containsthe binary data read from the TCP connection.

endOfStreamReached

boolean This element is set to true, when the end of the data stream isreached.

This is useful when the activity is in an iteration loop and theactivity is configured to read a number of bytes with each iteration.Use this element in the condition of the loop, to determine whenthe last set of bytes was read.

273


TCP Close ConnectionTCP Close Connection is a synchronous activity that closes a TCP connection opened by a previouslyexecuted activity or a process starter.

General


Field Description


Description


Input



connection binary The handle to the connection that you want to close.

This value is obtained from a previously executed activity in theprocess that opened the connection.

Output

The activity has no output.

TCP Open ConnectionTCP Open Connection is a synchronous activity that opens a connection to a TCP server. Afterestablishing the connection, the activity places a handle to the open connection in the connection outputelement. The subsequent activities in the process use this connection key for the TCP Connection toread data from, write data to, or close the connection.

General


Field



TCPConnection

Yes The TCP Connection is a shared configuration resource that specifiesthe connection information for the TCP server. Specify the requiredvalue in the TCP connection property.

274


Field


Local Host None Specifies the IP address on the local machine to be used as the TCPclient.

Description


Input



connection complex An optional element. This element contains the information about theTCP server you want to connect to. It comprises host, port, andlocalhost elements.

host string An optional element. The name or IP address of the TCP server youwant to connect to.

This value overrides the value specified by the TCP connectionproperty in the General tab.

port number An optional element. The port number on which the TCP server islistening for requests.

This value overrides the value specified by the TCP connectionproperty in the General tab.

localhost string An optional element. The name or the IP address of the TCP client.

Output



connection binary The handle to the open connection.

The subsequent activities in the process use this connection key to readdata from, write data to, or close the connection.

TCP ReceiverTCP Receiver is a process starter activity that starts the process when a client requests a TCPconnection. The connection element in the activity output contains the handle to the TCP connection.

275


The subsequent activities in the process can use this handle for the TCP connection to read data from,write data to, or close the connection.

General

The General has the following fields.

Field



Host Yes The hostname or the host IP address of the TCP server to connectto.

Port Yes Specify the port number on which this TCP server is listening forrequests.

Enable DNSLookup

None Select this check box to enable a domain name system (DNS)lookup for resolving the IP address to a DNS name.

Caution: Select this element only when required, as this mayadversely affect throughput.

Keep Alive None Select this check box to specify for the TCP connections to use thekeep alive feature of sockets.

Description


Advanced

The Advanced tab contains the following fields.

Field Description

Sequencing Key This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies which processesshould run in a specified order.

Process instances with sequencing keys evaluating to the same value areexecuted sequentially in the order of the process instance creation.

Custom Job Id This field can contain an XPath expression that specifies a custom ID for theprocess instance.

Conversations


For details about conversations, refer to Application Development.

276


Output



connection binary The handle to the open connection. This connection can be used bysubsequent activities in the process definition to specify the TCPconnection to write data to, read data from or close.

IP string The IP address of the client sending the TCP request.

Host string The host name of the client sending the TCP request. This field isavailable only when you select the Enable DNS Lookup field in theGeneral tab.

Port integer The port number of the client sending the TCP request.

Wait for TCP RequestWait for TCP Request is a signal-in activity that waits for a TCP client connection request. When aconnection request occurs, the activity places a handle to the open connection in the connection outputelement. The subsequent activities in the process use this connection key to read data from, write datato, or close the connection.

General


Field



Host Yes The hostname or the host IP address of the TCP server to connectto.

Port Yes Specify the port number on which this TCP server is listening forrequests.

Enable DNSLookup

None Select this check box to enable a domain name system(DNS)lookup for resolving the IP address to a DNS name.

Caution: Select this element only when required, as this mayadversely affect throughput.

277


Field


Keep Alive None Select this check box for the TCP connection to use the keep alivefeature of sockets.

TCP keep alive is different from HTTP keep alive.

Description


Event


Field Description


A message may arrive before this activity is executed. Specify the amount oftime (in seconds) for a message to wait, if the message is received beforethis activity is executed.


Specify the amount of time (in milliseconds) for an activity to wait before itis executed.

Conversations

You can initiate or join the conversation here. Click the Joining Existing Conversation button to

join multiple conversations. Click the Add New Conversation button to initiate conversations.

For details about conversations, refer to Application Development.

Output



connection binary The handle to the open connection. This connection key can be used bysubsequent activities in the process definition to specify the TCPconnection to write data to, read data from, or close.

IP string The IP address of the client sending the TCP request.

Host string The host name of the client sending the TCP request. Select the EnableDNS Lookup field in the General tab to enable this field.

Port integer The port number of the client sending the TCP request.

278


Write TCP DataWrite TCP Data is an asynchronous activity that sends data on the specified TCP connection. Theconnection must be opened by an activity or process starter that executed previously in the process.

General


Field



Type None The type of the data to write. This can be either Text or Binary.

Specifying Text in this field displays the Separator and Encodingfields.

Specifying Binary in this field displays the User Defined Separatorfield.

Separator Yes The type of separator to use. The separator is written to the TCPconnection after the specified data is written.

Select User-defined separator from the drop-down list to enablethe User Defined Separator field.

User DefinedSeparator

Yes This field specifies the separator character to use.

When Binary is selected in the Type field, a user-defined separatorcan be a string representation of a single byte value or it can becomma-separated byte values (for example, 0x0a, 0x0b, 0x0c). Forvalid string representations of byte value, refer to the Javadocumentation for the decode(String n) method of java.lang.Byte.

Encoding Yes When text data is specified, this field determines the characterencoding to use for the text data.

Description


Input

The following is the input for activity.


connection binary The handle to the connection that you want to write data to. Thisconnection is obtained from a previously executed activity in theprocess that opened the connection.

279



data string orbinary

The data to write to the TCP connection. The data type of this field iseither String or Binary, depending upon the data selected in the Typefield in the General tab.

encoding string An optional element. When writing text data, this specifies thecharacter encoding of the text. This value overrides the value specifiedin the Encoding field in the General tab.

separator binary An optional element. This is available only when you select the soption on the General tab.

Output

This activity has no output.

280


XML Activities Palette

The XML Activities palette provides activities for parsing XML strings into schemas and renderingschemas into XML strings.

Parse XMLParse XML is a synchronous activity that takes a binary XML file or an XML string and converts it intoan XML schema tree based on the XSD specified.

Parsing Date and Datetime Strings

In XML documents parsed by the Parse XML activity, datetime values are read in accordance with theISO-8601 standard, as described in the XML Schema specification. For example, the value:

2002-02-10T14:55:31.112-08:00

is 55 minutes, 31 seconds, and 112 milliseconds after 2.00 p.m. on February 10th, 2002 in a time zonethat is 8 hours, 0 minutes behind UTC.

If no time zone field is present, the value is interpreted in the time zone of the machine that isperforming the parsing. This can lead to complications if you are processing XML from a different timezone, so you are encouraged to always use a time zone.

General


Field Description


Input Style Can be binary, text, or dynamic.

In binary mode, the binary content is read. The encoding used for parsing thecontent is either the value specified in the forceEncoding input item, the encodingspecified in the XML header or the xmlBinary input item, or UTF-8 (the defaultencoding, if no encoding is specified).

In text mode, (the default and preferred choice) an XML string is passed as aninput item.

In dynamic mode, a choice is offered for input. You can either supply binary ortext input. You can use a choice statement and set substitution in the mapping tosupply the correct type of input at run time.

Description


Output Editor

Use the Output Editor tab to define a schema for the XML output.

Input


281



xmlString string The XML string to parse.

This input element is available when the Input Style field in theGeneral tab is set to text.

xmlBinary complex Available when you set the Input Style field in the General tab tobinary.

This input item contains a required bytes item for which you specifythe input XML bytes.

This input item also contains an optional forceEncoding item. Thisspecifies the encoding to use when parsing the XML. If this element isnot specified, the encoding specified in the XML header of the byteelement is used to parse the XML. If the encoding value is not specifiedin the XML header, the default encoding (UTF-8) is used.

xmlBinary|xmlString

choice Available when the Input Style in the General field is set to dynamic.

You can specify a choice statement and set substitution and supply thecorrect input type at run time.

Output



XML Schema complex The parsed XML schema is the output of this activity. The contents ofthe schema are determined by the schema defined in the OutputEditor tab.

Fault



XMLParseException An exception occurred when parsing the data.

UnsupportedEncodingExcept

ion

An unsupported encoding was specified in the forceEncodinginput item.

MissingByteCountException An exception occurred while parsing the data with an invalid ormissing byte count.

ValidationException The file specifies a version of XML that the parser is not preparedto handle.

282


Render XMLRender XML is a synchronous activity that takes an instance of an XML schema element and renders itas a stream of bytes containing XML or an XML string.

The Render XML activity takes an instance of an XML schema element and renders it as a stream ofbytes containing XML or an XML string. The schema is processed based on the XSD file specified.

Rendering Date and Datetime Strings

UTC time is used when datetime strings are generated. For example, the time 55 minutes, 31 seconds,and 112 milliseconds after 2.00 p.m.on February 10th, 2002 would be represented by the Render XMLactivity as 2002-02-10T14:55:31.112Z

General


Field



Output Style No Specifies whether the output should be text or binary data.

Format UsingDefaultNamespacePrefix

No Prepends the namespace with the default namespace prefix.

Encoding Yes This field is available only when the Output Style field is set totext. This field specifies the encoding value to place into the XMLheader of the rendered XML data.

You can specify any valid XML encoding value listed in IANA-Charsets.

Description


Advanced

Click the Advanced tab and specify which elements in the input schema can contain CDATA sections.Using CDATA sections you can enclose text within an element that should not be treated as XML.

Click the + button to add elements of the input schema to the list. When you click the + button, a dialogdisplays. Using this dialog locate and select the input schema by location in the project or bynamespace. Use the By Location tab if your input schema is located in the project directory. Use the ByNamespace tab if you constructed the input schema on the Input Editor tab.

Use the X button to remove the elements from the list and the up and down arrows to move elementsin the list.

283


Input Editor

From the Input Editor tab you can define a schema for the incoming XML data you want to render.

Input


Input Item Type Description

byteEncoding

string This is only available when you set the Output Style field in theGeneral tab to binary.

This specified the encoding value to place into the XML header in therendered XML output. This is also the encoding used to encode thebinary data. If this item is not specified, the default encoding of thejava virtual machine used by the process engine is used to encode thebinary data. This value may not be a valid XML encoding.

You can specify any valid XML encoding value listed in IANA-Charset. See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for acomplete list. The encoding names are case sensitive.

XMLSchema

string The XML schema to render. The contents of the schema are determinedby the schema specified in the Input Editor tab.

Output


OutputItem Type Description

xmlString string Available when text is selected in the Output Style field in the Generaltab. This item contains a stream of bytes representing the renderedXML.

xmlBytes bytes Available when binary is selected in the Output Style field in theGeneral tab. This item contains a stream of bytes representing therendered XML.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

XMLRenderException An exception occurred when rendering the data.

UnsupportedEncodingExce

ption

An unsupported encoding was specified in the byteEncoding inputitem.

MissingByteCountExcepti

on

An exception occurred while rendering the data with an invalid ormissing byte count.

284


http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets

Transform XMLTransform XML is a synchronous activity that invokes the built-in XSLT processor to apply an XSLTstylesheet to an XML source document and produce a result document.

Normally, transformation of data occurs by mapping process variables to an activity's input andapplying XPath expression to perform any transformation. If you have an XSLT file that you are usingfor transformation, or if an outside source supplies an XSLT file, this activity helps you to use the XSLTfile instead of manually creating the mappings.

For more information about creating and editing XSLT files, see the XSLT specifications at http://www.w3.org/TR/xslt.

General


Field Description


Stylesheet The XSLT file shared configuration resource to use when transforming the XML.You can also specify an XSLT stylesheet in the stylesheet input element, if desired.Stylesheets specified in the activity input override the stylesheet specified in thisfield.

Input andOutput Style

Specifies whether the input and output is binary data, text, or an XML tree.

Description


Input



xmlString binary The XML to transform. If the input/output style is set to binary,this element is named xmlBytesIn. If the input/output style is set totext, this element is named xmlString. If the input/output style isset to tree, this element is named xmlTree.

styleSheet string This optional element contains the XSLT stylesheet to use totransform the XML input. This stylesheet overrides the stylesheetspecified in the styleSheet field in the General tab.

parameter complex This repeating element contains the input parameters for thestylesheet.

Each input parameter is specified as name/value pairs. The nameis a string that corresponds to the name of the parameter specifiedin the XSLT stylesheet parameter list.

name string The name of the stylesheet input parameters.

285


http://www.w3.org/TR/xslt

http://www.w3.org/TR/xslt


value string The value to supply for the specified stylesheet input parameters.

isXMLDocument boolean Specifies whether the parameter is an XML document.

Output



xmlString text orbinary orcomplex

A binary or text value or an XML tree containing the output schemaspecified by the XSLT file.

The element is named xmlString and is of type text when you selecttext for the input/output style on the General tab. The element isnamed xmlOutput and is of type binary when binary is selected. Theelement is named treeOutput and is a complex type when you selecttree.

Fault


Fault Thrown When..

XMLTransformException An exception occurred when transforming the data.

UnsupportedEncodingExce

ption

Data was supplied that is encoded in an unsupported encoding.

MissingByteCountExcepti

on

An exception occurred while transforming the data with an invalidor missing byte count.

286


Activity Icons Reference

Basic Activities Palette

Critical Section Local Transaction For Each Iterate

Repeat Repeat on Error Scope While

Constructor

CompensateEmpty Exit

Get Context Invoke Rethrow Receive

Reply Set ContextSet EPR

Throw

File Palette

Copy File Create File File Poller List Files

Read File Remove File Wait for File Change Write File

287


FTL Palette

FTL Publisher FTL Reply FTL Request Reply FTL Subscriber

FTP Palette

FTP Change DefaultDirectory

FTP Delete File FTP Dir FTP Get

FTP Get DefaultDirectory

FTP Make RemoteDirectory

FTP Put FTP Quote

FTP Rename File FTP SYS Type

General Activities Palette

Assign Checkpoint Confirm External Command

Get Shared Variable Inspector Log Mapper

Set Shared Variable Sleep Timer

288


HTTP Palette

HTTP Receiver Send HTTP Request Send HTTP Response Wait for HTTPRequest

Java Palette

Java Invoke Java Process Starter Java To XML XML To Java

JDBC Palette

JDBC Call Procedure JDBC Query JDBC Update SQL Direct

JMS Palette

Get JMS QueueMessage

JMS Receive Message JMS Send Message Reply to JMS Message

RequestReply Wait for JMS Request

Mail Palette

Receive Mail Send Mail

289


Parse Palette

MiimeParser Parse Data Render Data

Rendezvous Palette

Rendezvous Publisher

Rendezvous Reply ToRequest

Rendezvous RequestReply

RendezvousSubscriber

Wait for RendezvousMessage

REST and JSON Palette

Parse JSON Render JSON

TCP Palette

Read TCP Data TCP Close Connection TCP Open Connection TCP Receiver

Wait for TCP Request Write TCP Data

290


XML Activities Palette

Parse XML Render XML Transform XML

291


TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks Bindings and Palettes ... · FTL Realm Server Connection ......

Documents

Transcript of TIBCO ActiveMatrix BusinessWorks Bindings and Palettes ... · FTL Realm Server Connection ......